01_ETR300R_Manual_Control_ver1.47_201304

ENTECELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD

ENTEC

Copyright © 2009 by ENTEC ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO., LTD all right reserved. Forerunner Distribution & Automation

Release Date: Apr. 2013 / Manual Revision: 1.47

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R

USER’S MANUAL

RECLOSER CONTROL ETR300-R http://www.entecene.co.kr

iENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

Release Note: [Apr. 2012] Ver1.40

Release note starts from version 1.40 [May. 2012] Ver1.41 Add “CLPU-TYPE 2 Setup” in “7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup”. [Aug. 2012] Ver1.42 Change the range and step of “M.A.D(Deg)” setting in “GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK” menu(in “6.4.1. Synchronism Check(25)”). [Aug. 2012] Ver1.43 Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.4 upgrading. 1. Change “Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection” in “2.4. Protection

Elements”. 2. Change “Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection” in “2.4.

Protection Elements”. 3. Change “Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection” in “2.4.

Protection Elements”. 4. Change “Live Load Blocking” in “2.5. Monitoring”. 5. Change the description of “Frequency” setting in “6.1.1. Power Line”. 6. Change the description of “Master IP Oct 1~4” settings in “6.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup”. 7. Change the step of “DCD CheckOut” setting in “6.2.2.1. PORT1(232) Setup”. 8. Change the range of “TX PostDelay” setting in “6.2.2.1. PORT1(232) Setup”. 9. Change the description of “IP Address Oct 1~4”, “Gateway Oct 1~4” and “Subnet Mask Oct

1~4” settings in “6.2.2.3. PORT3(EHTERNET) Setup”. 10. Change the default of “Wave Capture” and “Wave S/R” settings in “6.3. Event Recorder”. 11. Change the range of “M.A.D(Deg)” setting in “SYNCHROCHECK” menu.

- Change “Synchronism” in “2.5. Monitoring”. - Change the range of “M.A.D(Deg)” setting in “6.4.1. Synchronism Check(25)”.

12. Change the default of “Level” setting in “PQM / INTERRUPT” menu.

- Change “Power Quality Monitoring” in “2.5. Monitoring”. - Change the default of “Level” setting in “6.4.5.2. Interrupt”.

13. Change the default and description of “Level” setting in “6.4.5.10. Under Frequency”.


ii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

14. Change the default and description of “TD1-2 PU” setting in “6.4.6. TD Monitor”. 15. Change the default of “DLV Max” and “LLV Min” settings in “6.5. Loop Control”. 16. Change the default of “OUT101” setting in “6.7.2.2. Output Pulse Timer”. 17. Change the range of “Reclose 1” settings in “INTERVALS” menu.

- Change “Reclose Control” in “2.4. Protection Elements”. - Change the range of “Reclose 1” settings in “7.1.1. Reclose(79)”.

18. Change “7.1.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P)”.

- Change the default of “Phase Pickup Current”. - Change the default and description of “Curve”.

19. Change the default of “Curve” in “7.1.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51G)”. 20. Change the default of “Curve” in “7.1.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (46)”. 21. Change the range and default of “Time Delay” in “7.1.9. Phase High Current Lockout(50P-2)”. 22. Change the range and default of “Time Delay” in “7.1.10. Ground High Current Lockout(50G-2)”. 23. Change the range and default of “Time Delay” in “7.1.11. Negative Sequence High Current

Lockout(46(50)-2)”. 24. Change the settings in “COLD LOAD PICKUP” menu.

- Change “Cold Load Pickup Blocking” in “2.4. Protection Elements”. - Change the range of “PHA(A)” setting in “7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup”. - Change the default of “Outage Time” setting in “7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup”. - Change the range of “RMT Time” and “Rst Time” setting in “7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup

Setup”. 25. Change the default of “Type” setting in “7.1.13.1. Phase Directional Control(67P)”. 26. Change the default of “Type” setting in “7.1.13.2. Ground Directional Control(67G)”. 27. Change the range of “Factor b” setting in “7.1.18. Time Overcurrent Curves”. 28. Change the default of “Live Line Tm” setting in “7.1.21. Live Line”. 29. Change “7.1.22. Demand Current”.

- Change the default of “Function” setting in “DEMAND” menu. - Change the default and step of “GND Pickup” setting in “DEMAND” menu. - Change the step of “NEQ Pickup” setting in “DEMAND” menu.

30. Change the default of “L.O Priority” setting in “7.1.23.2. Others”. 31. Change the range of “Time” setting in “7.1.24. Phase Open/Loss”. 32. Change the default of “PHA-Pickup”, “GND-Pickup” and “NEG-Pickup” settings in “7.1.25.

Alarm Current”. 33. Change “7.1.26. Loss of Phase”.

- Change the range of “Function” setting in “LOSS OF PHASE” menu. - Change the step of “Pickup” setting in “LOSS OF PHASE” menu.


iiiENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

[Sep. 2012] Ver1.44 Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.7 upgrading. 1. Change the location of “AUTO SGRP CHANGE” menu.

- Change “Figure 5-14. Menu Structure Tree” in “5.2.1. MENU STRUCTURE TREE”. - Change “OTHERS” in “5.2.2. GLOBAL Setting”. - Change “5.2.3. GROUP Setting”. - Add “6.8.5. Auto Setting Group Change”.

2. Change “6.1.6. TIME ZONE”. 3. Add “Time Req(m)” setting in “6.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup”. 4. Add “6.2.1.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Setup”. 5. Add “6.2.1.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Setup”. 6. Change the default setting of “BI Queue size”, “AI Queue size” and “CI Queue size” setting in

“6.2.4. Event & Etc Setup”. [Dec. 2012] Ver1.45 1. Add the Note in “TIME ZONE”. 2. Change the description for “AEvt Skip at Ft”, “Time Syn’ Type” and “Time Tag Type” in “6.2.4.

Event & Etc Setup”. 3. Change “Figure 7-34. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)” in “7.1.18. Time

Overcurrent Curves”. [Dec. 2012] Ver1.46 1. Add the “Side panel Port A(Option)” in “2.7. Communications”. 2. Add “4) PORT A(Option)” in “4.2. Communication Port”. 3. Add “4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10(Option)”. 4. Change “Setting Examples” in “6.1.3. Voltage Sensing”. 5. Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware V3.80 upgrading.

- Add “Fault Locator” in “2.5. Monitoring”. - Change “Figure 5-14. Menu Structure Tree” in “5.2.1. MENU STRUCTURE TREE”. - Add “2V INS-Type” setting in “6.1.3. Voltage Sensing”. - Add “6.4.7. Fault Locator”. - Add “6.8.6. H/W Option”. - Change “8.3. Fault Cycle – Summary”.

6. Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware V4.00 upgrading. - Change the NOTE in “6.7.2.1. Input Debounce Timer”. - Change the NOTE in “6.7.2.2. Output Pulse Timer”. - Change “11.2. Input Ports”. - Change “11.3. Output Ports”.


iv ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

[Apr. 2013] Ver1.47 Changed the manual based on ETR300-R firmware Ver. 3.9(standard type) and Ver. 4.1(external I/O option type) upgrading. 1. Change the description of ‘RX’ and ‘TX’ lamps in “5.1.8. System Diagnostic Section”. 2. Add the setting items in “6.2.1.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Setup”. 3. Add the setting items in “6.2.1.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Setup”. 4. Add the setting item in “6.2.4. Event & Etc Setup”.


vENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 1

1.1. Description .......................................................................................................................... 11.2. Summary of Features .......................................................................................................... 2

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................. 6

2.1. Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................................................. 62.2. Type Withstand Tests ........................................................................................................... 82.3. Metering Accuracy .............................................................................................................. 92.4. Protection Elements........................................................................................................... 102.5. Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 152.6. Recorder ............................................................................................................................ 182.7. Communications................................................................................................................ 22

3. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... 23

4. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 24

4.1. Input and Output Terminal for SCADA ............................................................................ 244.2. Communication Port ......................................................................................................... 254.3. Current Input Terminal ...................................................................................................... 264.4. Voltage Input Terminal ...................................................................................................... 274.5. Monitor Terminal .............................................................................................................. 274.6. Trip & Close Terminal ....................................................................................................... 284.7. Outputs .............................................................................................................................. 284.8. Inputs ................................................................................................................................. 294.9. Power Input ....................................................................................................................... 294.10. Power Supply .................................................................................................................. 304.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10(Option) ................................................................................. 30

5. USER INTERFACE PANEL ........................................................................................ 32

5.1. Construction ...................................................................................................................... 335.2. LCD Display ..................................................................................................................... 425.3. Using the LCD Menu ........................................................................................................ 47

6. GLOBAL SETTING ..................................................................................................... 52


vi ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

6.1. System ............................................................................................................................... 526.2. Communication ................................................................................................................. 626.3. Event Recorder .................................................................................................................. 926.4. Monitoring ......................................................................................................................... 936.5. Loop Control ................................................................................................................... 1096.6. Passcode .......................................................................................................................... 1286.7. PLC .................................................................................................................................. 1296.8. Others .............................................................................................................................. 136

7. GROUP SETTING ...................................................................................................... 140

7.1. Protection(Primary, Alternate and Editebank Setup) .......................................................... 1417.2. Select Setbank ................................................................................................................. 233

8. EVENT RECORDER ................................................................................................. 234

8.1. Operation Event ............................................................................................................... 2348.2. Fault Event ...................................................................................................................... 2358.3. Fault Cycle - Summary .................................................................................................... 2378.4. System Event ................................................................................................................... 2388.5. Set Change Event ............................................................................................................ 2398.6. Aver. Load/Min ................................................................................................................ 2408.7. Peak. Load/Hour .............................................................................................................. 2418.8. Peak. Load/Day ............................................................................................................... 2428.9. Diagnostic Event ............................................................................................................. 2438.10. PQM .............................................................................................................................. 2448.11. Alarm Current Event ...................................................................................................... 2468.12. Clear Saved Data ........................................................................................................... 247

9. MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................ 248

9.1. Count ............................................................................................................................... 2489.2. Interrupt Time .................................................................................................................. 2559.3. Contact Wear ................................................................................................................... 2559.4. DATA RESET .................................................................................................................. 2569.5. CCU Information ............................................................................................................. 256

10. TIME .......................................................................................................................... 257

11. STATUS ...................................................................................................................... 258

11.1. Recloser ......................................................................................................................... 25811.2. Input Ports ..................................................................................................................... 260


viiENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

11.3. Output Ports ................................................................................................................... 261

12. METERING ............................................................................................................... 262

12.1. Metering Elements ........................................................................................................ 262

13. INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 270

13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch ......................................................................... 27013.2. Vent and Outer Cover .................................................................................................... 27113.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan .................................................................................... 27213.4. Earth Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................... 27413.5. Inner Structure ............................................................................................................... 27513.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions .................................................................................... 27613.7. User-Available DC Power ............................................................................................. 27713.8. Terminal Block and Fuses ............................................................................................. 27813.9. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type ...................................................................... 28013.11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 28213.12. CVD Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................. 28313.13. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation ................................................................. 28413.14. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions ................................................................ 28513.15. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling ............................................................... 28713.16. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions ...................................................................... 28713.17. AC Power Cable .......................................................................................................... 28813.18. Fuses ............................................................................................................................ 28813.19. Battery and Control run time ....................................................................................... 28913.20. Charge Circuit ............................................................................................................. 29013.21. Battery Change ............................................................................................................ 29013.22. Communication Cables ............................................................................................... 29113.23. Hardware Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 29213.24. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits ................................................................................. 29313.25. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close ......................................................... 29413.26. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram ................................................................................... 29513.27. Recloser Current Transformer (CT) ............................................................................ 29613.28. Recloser Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD) ................................................................ 29613.29. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type) ............................................................... 29713.30. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact ............................................................................. 29913.31. Recloser Trip and Close Coil ...................................................................................... 29913.32. Recloser Test Kit ......................................................................................................... 300


viii ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

14. MAINTANANCE ...................................................................................................... 301

14.1. Warning Events ............................................................................................................. 30114.2. Malfunction Events ....................................................................................................... 303

15. PLC function .............................................................................................................. 304


1ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1. Description

ETR300-R with the microprocessor-based digital control technology is designed to provide protective coordination and fault clearance of distribution systems for the continuous best quality of electric service.

Remote monitoring and control can be provided by RTU(Remote Terminal Unit - Option)

which fundamentally installed. ETR300-R provides protection, control, and monitoring functions with both local and remote.

It also displays the present trip/alarm conditions, and measured system parameters. Recording of past trip, alarm or control events, maximum demand levels, and energy metering

is also performed. Users can operate Close and Trip, and also control ETR300-R with key buttons on the user

interface panel; Protection Enabled, Ground Enabled, SEF Enabled, Reclose Enabled, Control Locked, Remote enabled, Alternate-settings, Loop control Enabled, Loop control auto restore, Hot line tag.

Users can manage the Recloser interface software using a portable PC for modification of

settings, acquisition of event data, and management of operation history. ETR300-R contains many T-C characteristic curves developed by IEEE C37.112, IEC255-3,

McGraw Edison, and KEPCO to provide fully protective coordination for the continuous best quality of electric distribution. Users can select any time of current curve simply by programming and modifying.


2 ENHANCED TECHNOLOGY

1.2. Summary of Features

PROTECTION Two Phase Time Over-current Elements Phase High Current Trip Elements Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Element Two Ground Time Over-current Elements Ground High Current Trip Elements Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Element Sensitive Earth Fault Elements Two Negative Time Over-current Elements Negative High Current Trip Elements Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Element Automatic Reclosing(Up To 5 Shots) Cold Load Pickup with Voltage Control Phase Directional Control Ground Directional Control Directional Sensitive Earth Fault Negative Sequence Directional Control Sequence Coordination Control Two Under-voltage Elements Two Over-voltage Elements Under-frequency Element Over-frequency Element Hotline Tag Element Loop Control



EVENT RECORDER Restart and Diagnostic counter Trip and fault counter PQM counter Communication counter Interrupt Time S/W Operation recorder - last 256 events Fault event recorder - last 256 events Fault Waveform(20 cycles× 32EA) - last 32 events System event recorder - last 2048 events Setting change event recorder - last 100 events Load profile recorder - last 6144 days Diagnostic event recorder - last 512 events PQM detection event recorder - last 512 events Alarm Current detection event recorder - last 512 events

MONITORING Alarm Current Demand trip and alarm(Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, I2) Phase Open trip and alarm Live Line Trip Counter Limit Synchronism Check Live Load Block Recloser main contact Wear(Per Phase) Breaker Failure with Current Supervision Power Quality Monitoring(PQM)

- Interrupt - Sag - Swell - Harmonics - Current Unbalance - Voltage Unbalance - Under Voltage - Over Voltage - Under Frequency



Battery Automatic Load Test Recloser Operation Failure Voltage Transformer Failure TD Monitor Fault Locator(This function is supported from Ver. 3.80 of ETR300-R.) Recloser Gas Over and Low pressure

NOTE : According to a recloser type, there may be no gas pressure monitoring.

METERING Each phase current and angle (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Isef) Each phase pick current (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Iq) Each phase line to line voltage and angle (Va, Vb, Vc, Vr, Vs, Vt, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vrs, Vst, Vtr) Current and voltage symmetrical component(I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2, 3V0) Source and Load side frequency Single phase and Three phase power(kW, kVar, kVA, PF) Energy(10kWh, 10kVarh) Single phase and Three phase present demand and max. demand(Ia, Ib, Ic, In, I2, kW, kVar) Source/Load voltage and current unbalance Voltage and current harmonics Voltage and current True R.M.S ETR300-R internal temperature Tranducers input (TD1~5)

COMMUNICATIONS Side panel PORT 1 RS232 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Side panel PORT 2 RS485 Serial Port : DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Side panel PORT 3 RJ45 Port : DNP 3.0 and IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Side panel PORT A RJ45 Port(Option) : I/O expendable communication Front Panel PORT F RS232 Serial Port : ETR300-R interface software



USER INTERFACE Fault indicators Manual Battery Load Test: Battery Voltage and Charge Voltage Dual Functional keypads 20×4 Character LCD Display 42 LED indicators - Fault indications, sequence status, battery status, etc RS232 port Setting Range Help Messages Access Security(2 passwords, security and related to communication)

AUXILIARY OUTPUTS 4 Opto-isolated Programmable Outputs

AUXILIARY INPUTS 4 Opto-isolated Programmable Inputs



2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.1. Inputs and Outputs

Systems

3phase-3wire or 3phase-4wire, 38 maximum, 800 Amp maximum

Frequency

50 / 60 system and ABC/ACB phase rotation

Control Voltage Input

AC Voltage Input 110V/220Vac or other voltage (+10%,-15%) Nominal Battery Voltage : 24Vdc

User available DC power Output - Option

DC Power Voltage : 12, 15, 24Vdc DC Power Continuous : 30W DC Power for 10Sec : 70W

Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Standard

Voltage Inputs V11, V12, V13, V21, V22, V23 and V10

Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <6V Burden: 0.002VA(4V)

Voltage Transformer Inputs (VT) - Option

Voltage Inputs V11, V12, V13, V21, V22, V23 and V10

Input Voltage Range : Phase-Neutral Continuous <300V Burden: 0.6VA(300V), 0.2VA(220V), 0.05VA(120V), 0.02VA(67V)



Current Transformer Inputs (CT) Current Inputs I01, I02, I03, IN and Ise I01, I02, I03, IN Input Current Range

1A Nominal 2A continuous 25A 1 second Burden : 0.38VA(1A)

SEF Input Current Range 0.05A Nominal 0.16A Continuous 0.6A 1 second Burden : 0.0375VA(0.05A)

Control Inputs - Option

Control Inputs 4 Channel Nominal Voltages and Operating Range

250Vdc(-15%,+20%) 125Vdc(-15%,+20%) 48Vdc(-15%,+20%) 24Vdc(-15%,+20%) 12Vdc(-10%,+30%)

Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages

Control Output Contacts - Option

Control Outputs 4 Channel 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection

Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20(+68) Maximum operating power

Table 2-1. Control Output Contacts

(L/R=7ms) 125Vdc 0.1A 48Vdc 0.8A 24Vdc 3A

(cosΦ=0.4) 250Vac 3A 125Vac 5A



2.2. Type Withstand Tests

Dielectric Strength

CT inputs, VT inputs, Control Power inputs, Opto-isolated inputs and Relay outputs

2(60) for 1 minute

Impulse Voltage

IEEE C62.45 (1992) Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic

Interference Transceivers, 6(1.2×50), 3(8×20)

Surge Withstand Capability

IEEE C37.90.1 - 1989 IEEE SWC Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems

(3 oscillatory 1 to 1.5, 5 fast transient 1.2×50) IEEE C37.90.2 - 1987 IEEE Trial-Use Standard, Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to

Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers, 10 V/m

(150 and 450, 5 W transmitter 10)

Vibration Test

IEC 255-21-1 - 1988 Electrical relays, Part 21 : Vibration, shock, bump, and seismic tests on measuring relays and protection equipment, Section One - Vibration tests (sinusoidal), Class 1

Control Operating Temperature

Operating range : -25∼+70(-13∼+158) LCD : -20∼+70(-4∼+158) - standard VFD : -40∼+85(-40∼+185) - option(Vacuum Fluorescent Display)



2.3. Metering Accuracy

The quantity of electricity used in metering and protection is based on fundamental content which harmonic is removed in input voltage and current parameters.

Voltage metering

Rated voltage : AC effective value voltage 4 V

Phase A, B, C : ±0.5%( 80 ～ 120 % of rated voltage), ±0.5˚ Zero sequence voltage(Vo) : ±0.5 %( 80 ～ 120% of rated voltage), ±0.5˚ V1, V2, 3V0 : ±0.6 %( 80 ～ 120% of rated voltage), ±1˚

Current metering

Rated current : AC 0.6 Arms

IA, IB, IC, IG : ±0.5 mA ± 0.5 % of reading(0.03~1.5 A), ±0.5˚ IN : ±0.005 mA + ±0.5 % of reading(0.5~16.0 mA), ±1˚ I1, I2, 3I0 : ±0.01 A ± 3 % of reading(0.003~1.5A ), ±1˚

Power metering

Apparent Power : ±1.2 %( Rated Voltage >80 %, Rated Current >0.03) Active Power : ±0.7 % PF=1, ±1% PF>0.87(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03) Reactive Power : ±0.7 % PF=0, ±1% PF<0.5(Rated Voltage >80%, Rated Current >0.03)

Frequency metering

Source/Load Voltage Frequency : ±0.02 Hz

Harmonic metering : ±5%

The above measurement accuracy is applied only for ETR300R. The measurement accuracy of

voltage and current after through ETR300R is about ±1 %. However, the accuracy can be changed by the type of CT and PT of a recloser.



2.4. Protection Elements

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent Protection

Phase/Ground/Negative Pickup Level ....................... 10A ~ 1600A in steps of 1A *. The setting range of Pickup Level can vary

according to H/W option. Dropout Level ........................................................... 96 to 98% of Pickup Curve Type

ANSI : Normally, Very, Extremely IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely EB : Normally, Very Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32

Time dial .................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01 Time adder ................................................................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s Minimum Response time........................................... 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s Reset Type ................................................................. Instantaneous/Linear Low Set Definite Time .............................................. OFF, 1 ~ 600 in steps of 1s Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5%

Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of trip time or ± 20

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

Active Sequence ........................................................ OFF, 1~5 in steps of 1 Phase/Ground/Neg’ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 20000A in steps of 1A Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01s Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5%

Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0 time delay (50 max) 5% of trip time or ± 20



Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Protection

Active Sequence ........................................................ OFF, 1~5 in steps of 1 Phase/Ground/Neg’ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 20000A in steps of 1A Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01s Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%


Sensitive Earth Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Pickup Level .............................................................. OFF, 0.1 to 160.0A in steps of 0.1A Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Time Delay ................................................................ 0.0 to 180.0 in steps of 0.1s Pickup Level Accuracy.............................................. 5%


Cold Load Pickup Blocking

Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ Function……………….OFF/ ON Phase/Ground/NEQ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A to 20000A in steps of 1A SEF Pickup Level ...................................................... OFF, 0.1A to 2000.0A in steps of 0.1A Outage Time .............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ R.M.T Function….…….OFF/ ON Phase/Ground/SEF/NEQ Restore Minimum Time ... 0.00 to 60.00 in steps of 0.01s(lower than Ver 3.4)

0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s (Ver 3.4 or higher)

Phase/Ground/SEF/NEQ Reset Time ....................... 0.00 to 60.00 in steps of 0.01s(lower than Ver 3.4) 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s (Ver 3.4 or higher)

Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU apply Curve Type ANSI : Normally, Very, Extremely IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely EB : Normally, Very Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s Korean Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32

Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU Multiple………..0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01



Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU Adder Time…….0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01sec) Phase/Ground//SEF/ NEQ CLPU M.R.T .................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01sec Make Use ‘I’……………………………………….NO/YES Multiple of Cold Load….………………………….0(OFF), 1.0 to 5.0 in steps of 0.1 Cold Load Time ......................................................... 1 to 720 min in steps 1 min Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... at 0 time delay (50 max) 5% of trip time or ± 20

Phase Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Positive Sequence Voltage V1 Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE Maximum Torque Angle ............................................ 0 to 359° in steps of 1° Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 in steps of 0.01 xVT Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2° Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle

Ground/Sensitive Earth Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Zero Sequence Voltage (–V0) For voltage element polarizing the source VTs must be connected in Wye Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE Maximum Torque Angle ............................................ 0 to 359° in steps of 1° Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 in steps of 0.01 xVT Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2° Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle

Negative Directional Control

Polarizing Voltage ..................................................... Negative Sequence Voltage(-V2) Detecting Direction .................................................... NONE/FORWARD/REVERSE Maximum Torque Angle ............................................ 0 to 359° in steps of 1° Minimum Polarizing Voltage ................................... OFF, 0.10 to 0.80 in steps of 0.01 xVT Block OC .................................................................. NO/ YES Angle Accuracy ......................................................... ± 2° Internal Operation Delay ........................................... 1.5cycle



Under/Over Voltage 1/2 Protection

Function..................................................................... OFF/TRIP/ALARM/TRIP&ALARM Pickup Level .............................................................. 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu Minimum Voltage ...................................................... 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup when over voltage

102 to 105% of Pickup when under voltage Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s Active Phases ............................................................ Any One/Any Two/All Three Normal Voltage Close ............................................... OFF/ON Close Wait Time ........................................................ 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s Close Wait Reset Time .............................................. 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s Min. Normal Voltage ................................................. 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu Max. Normal Voltage ................................................ 0.10 to 1.40 in steps of 0.01 pu Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20 Under/Over Frequency

Pickup Level .............................................................. OFF, 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01 Dropout Level ........................................................... at VT Pickup + 0.02 when under frequency at CVD Pickup+0.05 when under frequency

at VT Pickup - 0.02 when over frequency at CVD Pickup -0.05 when over frequency Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s (definite time) Minimum Voltage ...................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu Minimum Current .................................................... OFF, 1 to 630 in steps of 1A Normal Frequency Close ........................................... OFF/ON Close Wait Time ........................................................ 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s Close Wait Reset Time .............................................. 0 to 60000 in steps of 1s Min. Normal Voltage ................................................. 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01Hz Max. Normal Voltage ................................................ 40.00 to 65.00 in steps of 0.01Hz

Level Accuracy .......................................................... at VT ± 0.02, at CVD ± 0.05 Timing Accuracy ....................................................... 2cycle



Reclose Control

Operations to Lockout - phase trip ............................ 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout - ground trip .......................... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout - SEF trip .............................. 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations to Lockout - Negative Seq’ trip ............... 1 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations of Fast curve - phase trip ......................... 0 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations of Fast curve - ground trip ...................... 0 to 5 in steps of 1 Operations of Fast curve - Negative Seq’ trip ........... 0 to 5 in steps of 1 Reclose interval 1 ...................................................... 0.5 to 600.0 in steps of 0.1(lower than Ver 3.4)

0.1 to 600.0 in steps of 0.1(Ver 3.4 or higher) Reclose interval 2 ...................................................... 1 to 1800 in steps of 1 Reclose interval 3 ...................................................... 1 to 1800 in steps of 1 Reclose interval 4 ...................................................... 1 to1800 in steps of 1 Reset time for Auto Reclose Cycle ............................ 3 to 180 in steps of 1 Reset time from lockout ............................................ 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 C/P Wait Time ........................................................... 1.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01 Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5%

Phase/Ground/Negative Sequence Hot Line Tag

Curve Type ANSI : Moderately, Very, Extremely IEC : Normally, Very, Extremely EB : Normally, Very Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s Korean(Kepco) Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4 User programmable curves : USER-1, USER-2, USER-3, USER-4 McGraw-Edison : Non-Standard Curves 32

Time dial .................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 in steps of 0.01 Time adder ................................................................. 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s Minimum Response time........................................... 0.00 to 10.00 in steps of 0.01s Reset Type ................................................................. Instantaneous/Linear Pickup Level Accuracy .............................................. 5% Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 5% of trip time or ± 20

Sequence Coordination Control

Sequence Coordination.............................................. On/ Off



Lockout Priority Lockout Priority ........................................................ Phase/ Ground

F.I Reset Method Reset Method ............................................................ Auto/ Manual

Time Delay for Manual Close Time Delay ................................................................ 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s

2.5. Monitoring

Synchronism Check

Dead Voltage Maximum ............................................ 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu Live Voltage Minimum ............................................. 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu Maximum Voltage Difference ................................... 0.00 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01 pu Maximum Angle Difference ..................................... 0(OFF), 5° to 80° in steps of 1°(lower than Ver 3.4)

1° to 100° in steps of 1°(Ver 3.4 or higher) Maximum Frequency Difference .............................. 0.00 to 5.00 in steps of 0.01Hz Detect Phase .............................................................. ALL/ R(AB)/ S(CB)/ T Delay Time ................................................................ 0.0 to 180.0 in steps 0.1s

Operation Counter

Number of Pickup Limit ........................................... 1 to 20000 in steps of 1 Operation Counter Set ............................................... 0 to 10000 in steps of 1

Recloser Wear

Pickup Wear .............................................................. 0 to 100% in steps of 0.1

Rate System ............................................................... 15, 27, 38 Rate Interrupt() ...................................................... 5.0 to 50.0 in steps of 0.1 Number of Maximum Interruption ............................ 1 to 999 in steps of 1 Set Phase A Wear ....................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1 Set Phase B Wear ...................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1 Set Phase C Wear ...................................................... 0.0 to 100.0 % in steps of 0.1



Battery Automatic Load Test Test Period ................................................................. 0(OFF), 1 to 720 hours in steps of 1hour Power Quality Monitoring(PQM) Interrupt Pickup Level ............................................... 0(OFF), 0.10 to 0.49pu in steps of 0.01pu Interrupt Delay Time ................................................. 0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle Sag Pickup Level ....................................................... 0(OFF), 0.50 to 0.99pu in steps of 0.01pu Sag Delay Time ......................................................... 0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5 cycle Swell Pickup Level .................................................... 0(OFF), 1.01 to 1.50pu in steps of 0.01pu Swell Delay Time ...................................................... 0.5 to 10.0cycle in steps of 0.5cycle Voltage Total Harmonics Pickup Level ..................... 0(OFF), 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1% Voltage Total Harmonics Delay Time ....................... 0.2 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Current Total Harmonics Pickup Level ..................... 0(OFF), 0.5 to 100.0% in steps of 0.1% Current Total Harmonics Delay Time ....................... 0.2 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Voltage Unbalance Pickup Level ............................... 0(OFF), 0.30 to 0.95pu in steps of 0.01pu Voltage Unbalance Delay Time ................................. 0.1 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Current Unbalance Pickup Level .............................. 0(OFF), 1 to 100% in steps of 1%

Current Unbalance Delay Time ................................. 0.1 to 60.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Under Voltage Pickup Level ...................................... 0(OFF), 0.30 to 0.95pu in steps of 0.01pu Under Voltage Delay Time ........................................ 0.0 to 180.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Over Voltage Pickup Level ........................................ 0(OFF), 1.05 to 1.50pu in steps of 0.01pu Over Voltage Delay Time .......................................... 0.0 to 180.0sec in steps of 0.1sec Under Frequency Pickup Level ................................. 0(OFF), 46.00 to 59.98Hz in steps of 0.01Hz Under Frequency Delay Time ................................... 0.03 to 10.00sec in steps of 0.01sec Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit Current ......... 0 to 630A in steps of 1A TD Monitor TD1 Rate ................................................................... 1 to 200 in steps of 1 TD1 Ratio .................................................................. 1 to 3000 in steps of 1 TD1 Offset ................................................................. -10000 to +10000 in steps of 1 TD1-1 Type ............................................................... Under or Over TD1-1 PU ................................................................. 0(OFF), 0.1 to 6000.0 in step of 0.1 TD1-1 Delay ............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in step of 0.01sec TD1-2 Type ............................................................... Under or Over TD1-2 PU ................................................................. 0(OFF), 0.1 to 6000.0 in step of 0.1 TD1-2 Delay ............................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 in step of 0.01sec ※. NOTE : There is 4 more channels(TD2 ~ TD5) the same as above.



Live Load Blocking Function..................................................................... OFF/RECLOSING/CLOSE/BOTH Detect Level .............................................................. 0.10 to 0.90 pu in steps of 0.01 pu

Detect Time ............................................................... 0 to 60000ms in steps of 5ms Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20

Live Line Detect Level .............................................................. 0.10 to 0.90 pu in steps of 0.01 pu

Detect Time ............................................................... 0.0 to 180.0s in steps of 0.1s Dropout Level ........................................................... 95 to 98% of Pickup Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20

Demand Measured Values ....................................................... Phase A/B/C/G and NEQ Current(A) Phase A/B/C/G and NEQ Max. Current(A) Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Real Power(kW) Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Max. Real Power(kW) Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Reactive Power(kvar) Phase A/B/C/G 3Φ Max. Reactive Power(kvar) Measurement Type .................................................... Thermal Exponential/Rolling Demand Time Constant ........................................................... 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 or 60 min. Phase/Ground/NEQ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 1600A in steps of 1A Phase/Ground/NEQ Time Delay ............................... 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01s Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%

Phase Loss Detect On Level .................................................................... 70 ~ 85% of phase voltage (in steps of: 1%) Off Level ................................................................... 30 ~ 75% of phase voltage (in steps of: 1%) Delay Time ................................................................ 0.0 to 180.0 in steps 0.1s

Alarm Current Phase/Ground/NEQ Pickup Level ............................. OFF, 10A ~ 1600A in steps of 1A Phase/Ground/NEQ Time Delay ............................... 0.0 to 180.0 in steps 0.1s Level Accuracy .......................................................... ± 5%

Timing Accuracy ....................................................... ± 20



Fault Locator Total Length of Feeder .............................................. 0.1 to 99.9 of 0.1km Real impedance of the feeder positive seq. ............... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms Imaginary impedance of the feeder positive seq. ...... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms Real impedance of the feeder zero seq. ..................... 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms Imaginary impedance of the feeder zero seq ............. 0.1 to 6000.0 of 0.1ohms

NOTE : “Fault Locator” function is supported from Ver. 3.80 of ETR300-R.

2.6. Recorder

OPERATION EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source Recloser Closed(Manual/Remote CLOSE) Recloser Opened(Manual/Remote OPEN)

Storage Capacity : Total 256 Events

FAULT EVENT RECORDER

Trigger Source Protection pickup Elements Trip command active

Data Channels 5 currents(A, B, C, G, SEF)

Storage capacity : 256 events

FAULT WAVEFORM CAPTURE Trigger Source

Protection pickup Elements Trip command active

Data Channels 5 currents(A, B, C, G, SEF), 3 voltages(A, B, C), 32 logic input states, 16ch output relays,

16ch Input Sample Rate : 16/32/64/128 per cycle Trigger Position : 1 to 5cycle(128 sampling base and depending on the sample rate, it changes) Storage capacity : 32 events with max 160cycles(Cycle is dependent on sample rate)



SYSTEM EVENT RECORDER Trigger Source

Protection Elements 52A Contact Sequence status Front panel control AC supply External control Fail operation External input status System alarm

Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout Storage Capacity : Last 2048 Events

SET CHANGE EVENT RECORDER Trigger Source

Global Setting Change Primary Group Setting Change Primary Group Setting Change


LOAD PROFILE

1) Average Load/ Minute Trigger Source

Demand Current(A, B, C, G)

Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3ф) Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3ф) Trigger Time : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20 or 30 minute


2) Peak Load/ Hour Trigger Source


Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3ф) Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3ф)



Trigger Time : every 1 hour Storage Capacity : Total 6144 Events, 256days

3) Peak Load/ Day Trigger Source


Demand Real Power(A, B, C, 3ф) Demand Reactive Power(A, B, C, 3ф) Trigger Time : every 1 day

Storage Capacity : Total 6144 Events, 6144 days

DIAGNOSTIC EVENT RECORDER Trigger Source

System Power(AC, Battery, ±12V, +5V) A/D Conversion(A/D Fail, Reference Voltage1, Reference Voltage 2) Power Down Mode Gas Status Setting Change(Global Setting, Primary Setting, Alternate Setting) DSP Fail RTC Fail Memory Fail Flash-Rom Fail Circuit Voltage Fail Event Fail Count Fail DO Fail Close Fail Open Fail

Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout Storage Capacity : Last 512 Events

PQM EVENT RECORDER Trigger Source

PQM pickup Elements Storage Capacity : Total 512 Events Trigger Time : each 5 msec



ALARM CURRENT EVENT RECORDER Trigger Source

Phase A, B, C, N Alarm current Trigger Time : each 1/4 cycle Trigger type : Pick up and Dropout Storage Capacity : Last 512 Events

COUNTER System Restart : 0 to 65534 Diagnostic: 0 to 65534 Operation : 0 to 65534 Fault : 0 to 65534 PQM : 0 to 65534 Interrupt Time : 0 to 65534 cycle Communication : 0 to 65534

RECLOSER WEAR Phase A Wear : 0.0 to 100.0% Phase B Wear : 0.0 to 100.0% Phase C Wear : 0.0 to 100.0%



2.7. Communications

Table 2-2. Communications

Side panel Port 1

RS232, 1200-19200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit

DNP 3.0, Modbus and IEC60870-5-101 Protocol

Side panel Port 2

RS485/422, 1200-19200bps, None, Odd or Even Parity, 7 or 8 Data bits, 1 or 2 Stop bit


Side panel Port 3 RJ-45, 10BASE-T/100BASE-T


Side panel Port A(*Option) RJ-45, RS-422 communication method used

I/O expendable communication port

Front Panel Port F RS232, 1200-57600bps, No Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop bit

ETR300-R interface software



3. DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION

Figure 3-1. Construction and Dimensions(Standard)

TAGLOCKED

CONTROL

ENABLED

SEF

ENABLED

ENABLED

GROUND

RECLOSE

RCV

Antenna

GPS

PORT

RF

Antenna

A04

A05A06A07A08A09A10

A03

A02

A01

B05B06B07B08

B04

B03

B02

B01

TX RX

N.C

OUT101

OUT1

02OUT103

+ IN101

IN102

IN103

IN104

++

+OUT104

1:DC02

2,4:COM

1:+12V

3,4:GND

1,3:DC(+)

2,4:DC(-)

3:IN201

2,5:+12V

3,6:GND

1:IN204

4,8:COM

3,7:OUT204

2,6:OUT202

1,5:N/C

3:DC03

2:DC01

4:IN205

2:IN202

4:+12V

1:IN203

I01

I02

I03

INIse

E01

E02

E03

E04

E05

E06

E07

E08

E09

E10

5559 1

5559

1

5559 1

950

5559

1

5559

1

950

5559 1

POWER IN

K01

K02

K03

K04

-BAT

+BAT

AC 24V

AC 24V

POWER SUPPLY

INPUTS

OUTPUTS

MONITORS

12

34

CN7

1,3:P

2,4:N

N

P

J01

J02

J03J04

OUT2

05OUT2

06

H01H0

2H0

3H0

4H0

5H0

6

TRIP & CLOSE

CN6

CN5

CN4

CN3

CN2

CN1

5559 1

12

34

12

34

12

34

12

34

14

36

15

48

V11

V12

V13

V21

V22

V23

V0

+SG

-485

9:N/C

7:RTS

8:CTS

6:DSR

3:TXD

1:DCD

4:DTR

2:RXD

5:GND

485

10M/100M

F01

F02

F03

F04

F05

F06

G01

G02

G03

G04

G05

G06

G07

G08

PORT1

PORT

3PORT2

1

9

LIN

K1

23

2TX

2RX

1TX

1RX

XP

ORT

RJ4

5950

AWAKE

SETEVENT

METER

Control & Communication Unit ETR300-R02

PORT F

TRIP

TEST

ENABLED

AUTO RESTORE

FI

B Phase Unbalance

A Phase Unbalance

C Phase Unbalance

ABC / RST LIVE

ENABLED

PROTECTION

HOT LINE

SETTINGS

ALTERNATE

ENABLED

REMOTE

ENT

ESC

FUN

CHECK

BATT'RESET

LAMP TEST

OPENCLOSE

50 HIGH CURRENT

BATTERY

RUN

DIAG/ERROR

AC SUPPLY

CLPU ON

REVERSE POWER

GROUND

SEF

C FAULT

51 FAST/DELAY

50 INSTANTANEOUS

A FAULT

B FAULT

L1

L2

L3

L4

CHARGER

79 LOCKOUT

79 RESET

79 CYCLE

RX / TX

VA / VR

VB / VS

VC / VT

950-10

950-08



4. SIDE PANEL CONSTRUCTION ETR300-R Side panel construction is as follows.

Figure 4-1. Side Panel(Standard) Cable standard for connector refers to ‘Table 4-1. Cable rating for connector’.

Table 4-1. Cable standard for connector

Item Standard( ) Length( ) Model No. Remark

Current 1.25(50/0.18) 300 AkZ 960-10P

Power Supply " " AkZ 960-4P

Digital Input 0.75(12/0.18) " Molex 5557-6P,4P

Digital Output " " AkZ 950-6P

Voltage " " AkZ 960-6P,8P

4.1. Input and Output Terminal for SCADA

4 Input and 4 Output terminals for SCADA.

Figure 4-2. INPUTS and OUTPUTS

5559

1

5559

1

5559

1

950

5559

1

5559

1

950

5559

1

POWER IN

K01 K02 K03 K04

-BAT

+BAT

AC 2

4V

AC 2

4V

POWER SUPPLYINPUTSOUTPUTSMONITORS

12

34

CN7

1,3:P

2,4:N

NP

J01 J02 J03 J04

OUT205 OUT206

H01 H02 H03 H04 H05 H06

TRIP & CLOSECN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1

5559

1

12

34

12

34

12

34

12

34

1

4

3

6

1

5

4

8

V11 V12 V13 V21 V22 V23 V0

+ SG-4859:N/C

7:RTS 8:CTS6:DSR3:TXD1:DCD 4:DTR2:RXD

5:GND485

10M/100M

1:DC0

2

2,4:

COM

1:+12V

3,4:G

ND

1,3:

DC(+)

2,4:

DC(-)

3:IN201

2,5:

+12V

3,6:G

ND

1:IN20

4

4,8:CO

M

3,7:

OUT204

2,6:

OUT202

1,5:N/

C

3:DC0

3

2:DC01

4:IN20

5

2:IN202

4:+12V

1:IN203

I01 I02 I03 IN Ise

E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E06 E07 E08 E09 E10

OUT101 OUT102 OUT103

+IN101 IN102 IN103 IN104

+ + +OUT104

RCV Antenna

GPS PORT RF

Antenna

A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10A03A02A01 B05 B06 B07 B08B04B03B02B01

TX

RX

N.C

950-10 950-08XPORTRJ45950

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07 G08

PORT1 PORT3PORT2

1

9

LINK1 2 3

2TX2RX

1TX1RX

OUT101 OUT102 OUT103+IN101 IN102 IN103 IN104

+ + +OUT104

A04 A05 A06 A07 A08 A09 A10A03A02A01 B05 B06 B07 B08B04B03B02B01

N.C

950-10 950-08



4.2. Communication Port

1) PORT1(232) PORT1 has D-SUB 9pin as Male type and all pins are connected except pin number 9, RI(Ring Indicator).

Table 4-2. PORT1 Pin Description

Pin Signal Description

Figure 4-3. PORT1

1 DCD Data Carrier Detect

2 RXD Receive Data(IN)

3 TXD Transmit Data(OUT)

4 DTR Data Terminal Ready(OUT)

5 GND Ground

6 DSR Data Set Ready(IN)

7 RTS Request To Send(OUT)

8 CTS Clear To Send(IN)

9 N/C No Connection

2) PORT2(485) PORT2 has 3pins as in ‘Table 4-3. PORT2 Pin Description’.


Pin Description

Figure 4-4. PORT2

1 RS485+

2 RS485-

3 SG (Cable Shield)

PORT1

1

9

1T

1R

9: N/C7: RTS 8: CTS6: DSR3: TXD1: DCD 4: DTR2: RXD

5: GND

950

+ SG-

PORT2

485

1 2 32T

2R

485



3) PORT3(ETHERNET) PORT3 is RJ-45 that has 8pins as in ‘Table 4-4. PORT3 Pin Description’.


Pin Wire Color 10Base-T Signal 100Base-TX Signal

Figure 4-5. PORT3

1 White/Green Transmit+ 2 Green Transmit- 3 White/Orange Receive+ 4 Blue Unused 5 White/Blue Unused 6 Orange Receive- 7 White/Brown Unused 8 Brown Unused

4) PORT A(Option) PORT A is RJ-45 and is used for communication with External I/O Unit ETIO10. For detailed information on External I/O Unit ETIO10, refer to ‘4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10’. Figure 4-6. PORT A(Option)

4.3. Current Input Terminal

Current connector starts from pin number 1(A phse), 2(B phase), 3(C phase), 4(N, ground), 5(SEF) in turn and each phase name is indicated at current input Input connector of ETR300. Connector type is STLZ960-10.

Table 4-5. Current Input Pin Description

Figure 4-7. Current Input Terminal

Pin IO1 IO2 IO3 IN Ise

Description A phase

B phase

C phase

N phase SEF

XPORTRJ45

PORT3

LINK10M/100M

PORT-A

A TX

A RX

RS422



4.4. Voltage Input Terminal

Voltage connector receives source side 3 phases(A,B,C) voltages and load side 3 phases(R,S,T) voltages. Pin arrangement is as in ‘Table 4-6. Voltage Input Pin Description’. Connector type is STLZ960-6P and 8P.

Table 4-6. Voltage Input Pin Description

Pin V11 V12 V13 V21 V22 V23 V0

Default LCD Display A B C R S T V0

Figure 4-8. Voltage Input Terminal

4.5. Monitor Terminal

It is input terminal to monitor ETR300 status and its pin arrangement is as in ‘Table 4-7. Monitors Pin Description’.

Table 4-7. Monitors Pin Description

Figure 4-9. MoitersTerminal

Connector Pin Description

CN6 DC01 Gas Pressure, 10V

CN7 DC02 Spare, 20mA

DC03 Spare, 20mA



4.6. Trip & Close Terminal

Output terminal to control ETR300 and its arrange is as in ‘Table 4-8. TRIP & CLOSE Pin Description’.

Table 4-8. TRIP & CLOSE Pin Description

Figure 4-10. TRIP & CLOSE Terminal

Connector Pin Description

CN4 OUT202 CLOSE

OUT204 TRIP

CN5 DC POWER

4.7. Outputs

Digital Output(DO) terminal has total 2 relay output where sending a control signal, its pin arrangement is as follow.

Figure 4-11. Outputs



4.8. Inputs

5 inputs of status provision. Pin arrangement is as in ‘Table 4-9. Digital Input Pin Description’.

Table 4-9. Digital Input Pin Description

Figure 4-12. Digital Input Terminal

Connector Pin Description Connector Pin

CN2

01 Open status

CN2

04

02 Close status

04

03 Manual Unlock

04

CN3

01 Door open status

CN3

02, 05

04 Spare 02, 05

4.9. Power Input Power Input Terminal for ETR300’s Power Supply . Pin Configuration is followed ‘Table 4-10. Power Input Pin Description’.

Table 4-10. Power Input Pin Description

Figure 4-13. Power Input Terminal

Pin Description

K01 Battery + Terminal

K02 Battery –Terminal

K03 AC 24V Input terminal

K04 AC 24V Input terminal



4.10. Power Supply

Input and Output Terminal for Modem Power.

Figure 4-14. Power Input Terminal

CN1 Connector P : DC 24V + (rectified voltage) N : GND

J Connector P : DC 24V + N : GND

4.11. External I/O Unit ETIO10(Option)

By using the EXT Port, the number of input and output channels of ETR300-R is expanded. External I/O Unit ETIO10 is configured the following way.

1) COM Port RJ-45 ETR300-R Communication between

side panel Port A and RS422

2) DC Power Input DC Power Voltage : 12, 24, 110Vdc DC Power Continuous : 4W Figure 4-15. External I/O Unit ETO10

3) Inputs Channels Input 12 Channels Nominal Voltages and Operating Range

250Vdc(-15%,+20%) 125Vdc(-15%,+20%) 48Vdc(-15%,+20%) 24Vdc(-15%,+20%) 12Vdc(-10%,+30%)

Operating current : < 5mA at Nominal Voltages



4) Output Channels Output 8 Channels 300Vac / 350Vdc Varistor for differential surge protection

Operate / Release time : < 5ms at +20(+68) Maximum operating power

Table 4-11. Output Channel Contacts

(L/R=7ms) 125Vdc 0.1A 48Vdc 0.8A 24Vdc 3A

(cosΦ=0.4) 250Vac 3A 125Vac 5A

Figure 4-16. ETO10’s Side Panel

481248

DIDO

I/O U

NIT

ET

IO10

RS422

PORT1

POW

RUN

TX

RX

LAMPTEST

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9IN10 IN11IN12

OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 ALARM

SG FGP N

05 0604A01 02 03 07

04E01 02 03

08 09 10 05 0604B01 02 03

05 0604C01 02 03 05 0604D01 02 0307 08 07 08 09 10

ELECTRIC & ELECTRONIC CO,, LTD.ENTEC



5. USER INTERFACE PANEL This section describes the User Interface Panel(front-panel) User Interface Panel uses LCD(20×4) and keypad to provide any function selection for monitoring and LEDs indicates selected function status and recloser operation status. The User interface Panel control is used for; Directly control the recloser Verify control status View system status View metering value View information stored in the ETR300-R unit View and change the ETR300-R settings

Figure 5-1. User Interface Panel

RESET

LAMP TEST

OPENCLOSE

50 HIGH CURRENT

BATTERY

RUN

DIAG/ERROR

AC SUPPLY

CLPU ON

REVERSE POWER

GROUND

SEF

C FAULT

51 FAST/DELAY

50 INSTANTANEOUS

A FAULT

B FAULT

L1

L2

L3

L4

CHARGER

79 LOCKOUT

79 RESET

79 CYCLE

RX / TX

VA / VR

VB / VS

VC / VT

AWAKE

SETEVENT

METER


PORT F

TRIP

TEST

ENABLED

AUTO RESTORE

FI

B Phase Unbalance

A Phase Unbalance

C Phase Unbalance

ABC / RST LIVE

TAGLOCKED

CONTROL

ENABLED

SEF

ENABLED

ENABLED

GROUND

RECLOSE

ENABLED

PROTECTION

HOT LINE

SETTINGS

ALTERNATE

ENABLED

REMOTE

ENT

ESC

FUN

CHECK

BATT'



5.1. Construction

Panel consists of 8 sections as below; Operation section Local control section Menu control section Other control section Fault indication section Voltage elements section Reclosing Sequence status section System diagnostic section Battery status section User LED section Other status section

5.1.1. Operation Section

OPEN Pressing OPEN push-button sends a trip signal to the Recloser.

CLOSE Pressing CLOSE push-button sends a close signal to the Recloser. Units operating with firmware version 2.18 or later have a feature of Close Time Delay. The Close Time Delay allows a delay of 0.00 to 600.00 seconds after pressing the close push-button before closing the recloser.

POSITION LED Indicates the position of the Recloser. Position indicator is based on the Recloser 52a contacts.

Figure 5-2. Operation Section



5.1.2. Local Control Section

All indicators show status of Control function. The indicators are continuously ON when the control function is enable and the indicators are continuously OFF when control function is

DISABLE. The push-button toggles Enable/Disable

PROTECTION ENABLED All Protection elements are enabled

GROUND ENABLED Ground Protection elements are disabled

SEF ENABLED SEF Protection elements are disabled

RECLOSE ENABLED Reclose function is enabled

CONTROL LOCKED Front panel function is unlocked

REMOTE ENABLED Remote control is disabled

ALTERNATE SETTINGS Alternate setting is disable Primary Setting is enable

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED Loop control function is enabled

LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE Auto restoration function of is enabled

HOT LINE TAG Hot Line Tag function is disabled

Figure 5-3. Local Control Section

Protection Enabled When illuminated, all protection elements are enabled. The enabled protection condition can be disabled by pressing the Protection Enabled push button on the front panel.

NOTE : If “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, all protection elements are operating,

however, Ground Overcurrent Protection Element and Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Element are individually set for enable or disable on front panel by LED ON/OFF button.



Ground Enabled LED is ON and OFF by pressing a button. “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is ON and GROUND ENABLED LED is ON, Ground Overcurrent Protection element operates. However, Even if “GROUND ENABLED” is ON and “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is OFF, Ground protection does not operate. If “GROUND ENABLED” is OFF, “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, ground protection does not operate.

SEF Enabled LED is ON and OFF by pressing a button. “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is ON and SEF ENABLED LED is ON, sensitive earth fault protection element operates. However, Even if “SEF ENABLED” is ON and “PROTECTION ENABLED” LED is OFF, sensitive earth fault protection does not operate. If “SEF ENABLED” is OFF, “PROTECTION ENABLED” is ON, sensitive earth fault protection does not operate.

Reclose Enabled When Reclose Enable LED is on, the reclose(79) element is enabled. The enabled reclose element can be disabled by pressing the Recloser Enabled push-button on the front panel.

Control Locked When Control Locked LED is on, all functions in operation section and all functions in Local control section are locked. These can be unlocked by pressing the Control Locked push-button on the front panel

NOTE : Even though Control Locked function is locked, OPEN, Lamp Test, Battery Load

Test and menu control section can be normally operated.

Remote Enabled When Remote Enabled LED is on, all remote control functions (e.g. SCADA system) are enabled. This can be disabled by pressing the Remote Enabled push-button on the front panel. SCADA control refers to supported communications protocol such as DNP3.0

Alternate Enabled When Alternate Enabled LED is on, the Alternate setting is activated. When Alternate Enabled LED is off, the primary setting is activated. Activated group on display, is applied to ‘GROUP Setting’.



Loop Control Enabled When Loop Control Enabled LED is on, loop control function is enabled. SEC, MID can be selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be selected on OPEN status.

Loop Control Auto Restore When Loop Control Auto Restore LED is on, auto restoration function is enabled. Auto restoration function is, after loop control operation, Auto Ret’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restores the preset values.

Hot Line Tag When Hot Line Tag LED is on, the Hot Line Tag function is enabled.

5.1.3. Menu Control Section

ETR300-R has 20×4 LCD(Liquid Cristal Display) display.

LCD DISPLAY 4x20 Characters display

CONTROL KEYS [] [] [] [] Arrow keys are used for the moving between the menu window and the changing of the setting value

[] (METER) : Up arrow key is used to move to the meter menu, operable in menu starting mode [] (AWAKE) : Down arrow key is used for panel awake from sleep mode [] (EVENT) : Left arrow key is used to move to the event menu, operable in menu starting mode[] (SET) : Right arrow key is used to move to the setting menu, operable in menu starting mode [FUN] : To move to main menu when present mode is in starting mode [ESC] : To cancel for data input mode or return the display to the previous level [ENT] : To select sub menu or data input



Figure 5-4. Menu Control Section

[FUN] Key Press [FUN] key to enter Main menu for displaying information or changing settings. [FUN] key is also used to display a help message in setting change mode and to cancel the help message display.

[ESC] Key The ESC key can be used to cancel data input mode and return to the previous menu.

[ENT] Key ENT key is used to select a menu by using Up and Down arrow key. Enter key is also used to accept a new setting by using Up or down arrow key.

[] [] Key Use the left and right arrow keys to move cursor when you are in the data input mode and when you change display message.

[] [] Key Use Up and Down arrow keys to move through the various menus and to decrease or increase value when you are in the data input mode.



5.1.4. Other Control Section

BATT’ CHECK Push-button for battery load test. Battery alarm setting, refer to TD menu.

TRIP TEST Push-button for trip test. By pressing this butoon, fault simulation is activated like 1500A of fault current flow in phase A, B, C. Protection function is operated according to the user setting .

FI RESET Reset fault indication/Lamp test

Figure 5-5. Menu Control Section

5.1.5. Fault Indication Section

On fault detection, protection elements and phase are displayed which detects more than overcurrent set level.

Phase Time Over-current Elements – Fast/Delay Phase High Current Trip Elements Phase Definite Time High Current Lockout Elements Ground Time Over-Current Elements – Fast/Delay Ground High Current Trip Elements Ground Definite Time High Current Lockout Elements Sensitive Earth Time Over-Current Elements Negative Sequence Time Over-Current Elements -

Fast/Delay Negative Sequence High Current Trip Elements Negative Definite Time High Current Lockout Elements Phase, Ground, Sensitive Earth and Negative Directional

Control

Figure 5-6. Fault Indication Section



TRIP TYPE 51 FAST/DELAY : Shows delay trip 50 INSTANTANEOUS : Shows high current trip 50 HIGH CURRENT : Shows high current lockout

FAULT INDICATION A, B, C FAULT : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on one of the phase lines GROUND : Indicates an over-current fault has occurred on the neutral line SEF : Indicates a sensitive earth fault has occurred on the neutral line

5.1.6. Voltage Elements Section Indicates that voltage pickup element is operated. Two Under voltage Elements Two Over voltage Elements Synchronism Element Under frequency Element Hot Line Elements

A Phase Unbalance : A phase angle difference detected B Phase Unbalance: B phase angle difference detected C Phase Unbalance: C phase angle difference detected ABC/RST LIVE : Source and load side live line status

Figure 5-7. Voltage Elements

Section

VA/VR, VB/VS, VC/VT : Each phase Phase Open/Loss Status 5.1.7. Reclosing Sequence Status Section

Indicates the current status of programmed sequence procedure.

79 RESET : Sequence shows resetting 79 CYCLE : Sequence shows running 79 LOCKOUT : Sequence shows lockout

Figure 5-8. Sequence Status Section

VA / VR

VB / VS

VC / VT

B Phase Unbalance

A Phase Unbalance

C Phase Unbalance

ABC / RST LIVE



5.1.8. System Diagnostic Section

Indicates Diagnostic status of the ETR300-R. RUN LED(green) indicates the ETR300-R has successfully passed its internal diagnostic test. DIAG/ERROR LED(Red) indicates the ETR300-R has failed its internal diagnostic test. RX/TX LED(Red) shows Communication status of ETR300-R.

RUN Status of ETR300-R systems shows normal

DIAG/ERROR Status of ETR300-R systems shows warning

RX Shows the data receiving status for remote communication.

Figure 5-9. System Diagnostic Section

TX Shows the data transferring status for remote communication.

NOTE : RUN LED is blinking when system functional status is normal

5.1.9. Battery Status Section

Indicates the system power status of the ETR300-R. AC SUPPLY indicates the ETR300-R has external power source. CHARGER LED shows ETR300-R charging status, BATTERY LED shows ETR300-R battery status.

AC SUPPLY Status of supplying the external AC power.

CHARGER If Charger LED is On, charger is normal status. Chargingvoltage is always monitored, refer to TD menu for detail.

BATTERY If Battery LED is On, battery is normal status. To check the battery, do battery load test and check LED status.

Figure 5-10. Battery Status Section



5.1.10. User LED Section

Status of PLC logic which is set by a user is displayed. PLC logic is set in ‘ETR300-R interface software’. Factory default setting is as follows.

Figure 5-11. User LED Section Table 5-1. Default User LED Function

LED No Name Descrpition

L1 MLOCK L1 becomes ON when handle is locked.

L2 GASLOW + GASHIGH

L2 becomes ON when gas pressure is low or high.

L3 DSPLINK L3 becomes ON when dsp bord linked.

L4 CPULINK L4 becomes ON when communication bord linked.

5.1.11. Other Status Section

REVER POWER When reverse current flows, REVERSE POWER LED becomes On. Reverse power is determined by 3-phase power factor.

CLPU ON In the Cold Load Duration, CLPU ON LED becomes On.

Figure 5-12. Other Status Section



5.2. LCD Display

20 × 4 character LCD which has back-light support, is used for a user to operate conveniently and to check operation status clearly.

Figure 5-13. Initial Logo and Main Menu

5.2.1. MENU STRUCTURE TREE Screen structure consists Initial Logo and Main menu. Initial screen and all menu are round robin algorithm. Menu screen is divided in to Setting and Event management menu. Main menu has 7 sub-menus.



[MAIN MENU] >1.SYSTEM

>1.POWER LINE

2.CURRENT SENSING

3.VOLTAGE SENSING

4.CB OPENING TIME

5.GAS SENSOR TYPE

6.TIME ZONE

>2.COMMUNICATION >1.PROTOCOL SETUP

>1.DNP3 S1

2.DNP3 S2

3.IEC870-5-101

4.IEC870-5-104

5.MODBUS

>1.GLOBAL SETTING

>1.PORT1(232)

2.PORT3(485)

3.PORT4(ETHERNET)

4.PORTF(232)

>3.EVENT RECORDER

>4.MONITORING

>1.COMMON

>1.LOGIC TIMER

2.PULSE TIMER

3.PULSE COUNTER>7.PLC

>2.DI/DO>1.INPUT DEBOUNCE

2.OUTPUT PULSE TIME

>1.TIME DISP’TYPE2.PANEL SLEEP TIME

3.Vo SELECT

4.FACTORY DEBUG

5.AUTO SGRP CHANGE

6.H/W OPTION

>8.OTHERS

>2.GROUP SETTING

>4.SELECT SETBANK

>2.ALTERNATE

>19.DIRECTION

>*.SAVE SETTING

>1.PHASE

2.GROUND

3.SEF

4.NEG SEQ

>3.EVENT

>1.OPERATION

2.FAULT

3.FAULT CYCLE

4.SYSTEM

5.SET CHANGE

6.AVER.LOAD/MIN

7.PEAK.LOAD/HOUR

8.PEAK.LOAD/DAY

9.DIGNOSTIC

10.PQM

11.ALARM CURRENT

>4.MAINTENANCE >1.COUNT

>2.INTERRUT TIME

3.CONTACT WEAR

>4.DATA RESET

>1.CCU

2.OPERATION

3.FAULT

4.PQM

5.COMMUNICATION

>1.CCU COUNT

2.OPERATION COUNT

3.FAULT COUNT

4.PQM COUNT

5.COM’COUNT6.COUNT ALL

7.INTERRUT TIME

8.CONTACT WEAR

9.ENERGY

10.MAX DEMAND

11.PEAK CURRENT

12.COMM BUFF

13.ABOVE ALL

>5.CCU INFO

>1.RECLOSER

2.INPUT PORTS

3.OUTPUT PORTS>6.STATUS

>5.TIME

>7.METERING

>1.CURRENT

2.VOLTAGE

3.FREQUENCY

4.POWER

5.ENERGY

6.DEMAND

7.UNBALANCE

8.HARMONICS

9.TRUE R.M.S

10.TD

11.CCU SEF

>1.SYNCHROCHECK

2.OPERATION COUNT

3.CONTACT WEAR

4.BATTERY TEST

>5.PQM

>3.DIALUP MODEM

>2.PORT SETUP

>5.LOOP CONTROL

>3.PICKUP CURRENT

4.PHASE FAST

5.PHASE DELAY

6.GROUND FAST

7.GROUND DELAY

8.SEF ELEMENT

9.NEG SEQ FUNC

10.NEG SEQ FAST

11.NEG SEQ DELAY

12.H/C TRIP-PHA

13.H/C TRIP-GND

14.H/C TRIP-NEG

15.H/C LOCKUOT-PHA

16.H/C LOCKUOT-GND

17.H/C LOCKUOT-NEG

18.COLD LOAD PICKUP

>1.PQM FUNCTION

2.INTERRUPT

3.SAG

4.SWELL

5.HARMONICS

6.CURR UNBALANCE

7.VOLT UNBALANCE

8.UNDER VOLTAGE

9.OVER VOLTAGE

10.UNDER FREQUENCY

11.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT

>1.USER CURVE 1

2.USER CURVE 2

3.USER CURVE 3

4.USER CURVE 4

>25.LIVE LINE

26.DEMAND

27.OTHER ELEMENT

28.ON/OFF LEVEL

29.ALARM CURRENT

30.LOSS OF PHASE

*.SAVE SETTING

>12.CLEAR SAVED DATA

>1.OPERATION

2.FAULT

3.FAULT WAVE

4.SYSTEM

5.SET CHANGE

6.LOAD PROFILE

7.DIGNOSTIC

8.PQM

9.PQM WAVE

10.ALARM CURRENT

11.ABOVE ALL

>1.PRIMARY

>1.UNDER/OVER VOLT 1

2.UNDER/OVER VOLT 2

>23.LIVE LOAD BLOCK

>21.FREQUENCY

>20.VOLTAGE

>3.EDITBANK

>1.DIAL1

>6.PASSCODE>1.PASSCODE1

2.PASSCODE2

>2.INTERVALS

>1.PHASE/NEG SEQ’2.GROUND

3.SEF

4.OTHERS

>1.OPERATION

>1.UNDER/OVER FREQ’

>22.USER CURVE

>24.HOTLINE TAG

>1.PHASE

2.GROUND

3.SEF

4.NEG SEQ

>4.EVENT&ETC SETUP

5.FTP FILE TRANSFER

*.SAVE SETTING

>1.CALLING STRING

2.CALLING NUMBER

3.INITIAL STRING

4.CONNECTION

>6.TD MONITOR

7.FAULT LOCATOR

*. Note ) Menu Structure Tree may be different according to the version and option of ETR300-R.

Figure 5-14. Menu Structure Tree



5.2.2. GLOBAL Setting SYSTEM Set items related to system elements. Consists of POWER LINE, CURRENT SENSING, VOLTAGE SENSING, CB OPENING TIME, GAS SENSOR TYPE and TIME ZONE. TIME ZONE menu is optional and related Time Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG). COMMUNICATION Set items related to communication elements. Consists of PROTOCOL SETUP, PROT SETUP, DIALUP MODEM, EVENT&ETC and FTP FILE TRANSFER. EVENT RECORDER Set items related to fault wave recorder elements. MONITORING Set items related to measurement and maintenance. Consists of SYNCHROCHECK, OPERATION COUNT, CONTACT WEAR, BATTERY TEST, PQM, PD and TD MONITOR. LOOP CONTROL Set items related to loop control elements. PASSCODE Set items related to passcode sequrity. Consists of PASSCODE1 and PASSCODE2. PASSCODE2 is related communication settings and PASSCODE1 is related other settings. PLC PLC (Programmable Logic Control) elements and related elements are set. This menu consists of COMMON and DI/DO sub-menu. OTHERS Set items related to other elements. Consists of TIME DISP’ TYPE, PANEL SLEEP TIME, Vo SELECT, FACTORY DEBUG and

AUTO SET-GROUP CHANGE. FACTORY DEBUG menu is used only maker.



SAVE SETTING Save all changed values.

5.2.3. GROUP Setting This menu is divided into Primary group and Alternate group for user’s convenient. A group is

selected by ON/OFF ‘ALTERNATE SETTINGS’ LED on ETR300-R panel.

(1) Select Set-group Consists of Primary group and Alternate group.

PRIMARY GROUP : If ‘ALTERNATE SETTINGS’ LED is OFF, primary group settings are applied to protection elements.

ALTERNATE GROUP : If ‘ALTERNATE SETTINGS’ LED is ON, alternate group settings are applied to protection elements.

Ficture 5-15. PRIMARY GROUP and ALTERNATE GROUP

[ALTERNATE SETTINGS] button is used to select a group to apply present protection elements.

(2) Select Setbank ETR300-R has 6 SetBanks(BANK1 ~ BANK6). In this menu, Primary, Alternate and Edit bank select SetBank. Primary : Select SetBANK to be applied to System.

Alternate : Press [Alternate Enable] button and select a SetBANK to apply in the system. Edit : Select a SetBANK to edit.

(3) Primary Setting Set items related to protection elements.

(4) Alternate Setting Protection elements and its related elements are set in this menu. Set elements are the same as“PRIMARY SETTING” . Protection elements and related elements are set in this menu. Set elements are the same as “PRIMARY SETTING”.

[GROUP SETTING] >1.PRIMARY 2.ALTERNATE



(5) Editbank Setting Protection elements and its related elements are set in this menu. Set elements are the same as“PRIMARY SETTING” . Protection elements and related elements are set in this menu. Set elements are the same as “PRIMARY SETTING”.

5.2.4. Event ERT300-R Event information is shown in this menu. Consists of OPERATION, FAULT, FAULT CYCLE, SYSTEM, SET CHANGE, AVER.LOAD/MIN, PEAK.LOAD/HOUR, PEAK.LOAD/DAY, DIAGNOSTIC, PQM, ALARM CURRENT and CLEAR SAVED DATA.

5.2.5. Maintenance Shows about Event Maintenance items.

COUNT : Shows counters related with system restart and diagnostic. INTERRUT TIME : Interruption occurring cumulated time is displayed. CONTACT WEAR : Shows any damage Interrupter. DATA RESET : Maintenance related data is Reset. CCU INFO : Present ETR300-R information is displayed.

For more detail information, please refer to “9. Maintenance” .

5.2.6. Time Present time can be set and checked.

5.2.7. Status Present status of recloser and Input/Output are displayed.

5.2.8. Metering Shows metering values. For more details, refer to (see 12. METERING)



5.3. Using the LCD Menu

5.3.1. INITING LOGO Important information is displayed in the initial screen for user convenience in ETR300-R.

① To move to other initial screen, press [ENT] button.

② Press [FUN] or [ESC] button in initial screen to move to Main menu.

INITING LOGO

Initial Screen 1

① SEQUNCE: Number of reclosing operation(0~4) is displayed. ② REC STATUS: Circuit Breaker Open/Close Status is displayed.

CLOSE: Displays Circuit Breaker is closed. OPEN: Displays Circuit Breaker is opened. TROUBLE: It is displayed in case of Contact status is incorrect

or cable connection is not completed.

③ It is showing reclosing sequence process. If the total operation number is set for 4 times and continuous

fault occurred. When SEQUENCE number 0 is displayed, SEQ[HOME] is

displayed. It means reclosing ready state. When SEQUENCE number 1~3 is displayed, SEQ[RUN] is

displayed. It means reclosing running state. When SEQUENCE number 3 is displayed and SEQ[L-OUT] is

displayed. It means recloser lockout state.

④ It is showing auto closing status. It is related voltage and frequency protection function, When A-CL[RUN] is displayed, voltage or frequency is normal

state and auto closing timer is runnig state.

NOTE :

If “WARING SYSTEM ERROR” in the initial screen, control panel is in abnormal condition. Immediately stop operation and contact Manufacturer.

[BI-CCU(R) FOR DAS]SEQUENCE : ①

REC STATUS : ②

SEQ[ ③ ] A-CL[ ④ ]

[BI-CCU(R) FOR DAS]SEQUENCE : 4 REC STATUS : OPEN SEQ[L-OUT] A-CL[ - ]



INITING LOGO

Initial Screen 2 ① Each phase current value is displayed(A,B,C,N)[A]. ② Each phase voltage is displayed(A,B,C/R,S,T) [kV]. ③ SEF current value is displayed [A].

Initial Screen 3 If Time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is installed, received time synchronization data is displayed. If Time synchronization module option is not exist, “GPS MODULE NOT INSTALLED” is displayed. Check Time Synchronization module antenna install before checking time synchronization data. ① GPS receiving status display.

Normal connection, [LINK Success] is displayed. Connection fail, [SAT’ LINK Fail] is displayed.

② Received time information, UTC(Universal Time Coordinated) from GPS. Local time is set by (Main Menu / Global Setting / System / Time Zone), and check Time in Main Menu.

③ Longitude(° , " , ') is displayed. ④ Latitude( ° , " , ' ) is displayed.

Initial Screen 4 If Loop control function is installed, this screen is displayed. LOOP CONTROL: [SEC], [MID], [TIE] Display a selected type. VS: [DV], [LV] Display source side voltage of recloser either dead line or live line. VL: [DV], [LV] Display load side voltage of recloser either dead line or live line. VSDLT: [ - ], [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line of source side. VLDLT: [ - ], [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line of load side.AUTO RESTORE T: [ - ], [RUN] Displays restoring status after loop control operation.

LOOP CONTROL [TIE] VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ - ] VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ - ] AUTO RESTORE T [ - ]

GPS [ ① ] ②

[ ③ ] [ ④ ]

GPS [LINK Success] 2010/01/07 14:48:50 [N 89D 60M 0.00S ] [E 0D 0M 0.00S ]

A: ① ② / ② B: ① ② / ②

C: ① ② / ② N: ① SEF: ③

A: 0 0.0/ 0.0 B: 0 0.0/ 0.0 C: 0 0.0/ 0.0 N: 0 SEF: 0.00



5.3.2. MAIN MENU In the initial menu, press [FUN] button, it is moved into Main menu. If press [FUN] or [ESC] button in main menu, it is moved to the initial menu. Main menu has sub-menu as below.

MAIN MENU

Main Menu consists of 7 sub-menu.

You can choose any sub-menu by using [] [] key. Press [ENT] key to select the sub-menu.

As above explanation, you can move and select sub-menu.

5.3.3. View Example To see External input port status. Move to “MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS”. The following screen is displayed.

MAIN MENU/ STATUS/ INPUT PORTS

LO/DEASSERT : Shows External Input is de-asserted, HI/ASSERT : Shows External Input is asserted.

Only 4 lines are displayed on LCD Screen, use [] [] key to see next lines.

[INPUT PORT] IN 101 :LO/DEASSERT IN 102 :LO/DEASSERT IN 103 :LO/DEASSERT IN 104 :LO/DEASSERT IN 105 :LO/DEASSERT IN 106 :LO/DEASSERT IN 107 :LO/DEASSERT IN 108 :LO/DEASSERT IN 201 : HI/ASSERT IN 202 : HI/ASSERT IN 203 : HI/ASSERT IN 204 : HI/ASSERT IN 205 : HI/ASSERT IN 206 : HI/ASSERT IN 207 : HI/ASSERT IN 208 : HI/ASSERT

[MAIN MENU] >1.GLOBAL SETTING 2.GROUP SETTING 3.EVENT 4.MAINTENANCE 5.TIME 6.STATUS 7.METERING



5.3.4. Setting Example Step to change Phase Pickup current of protection elements in Primary setting. 1) Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY/ PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE”.

A following screen is displayed.

MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY/ PICKUP CURRENT / PHASE

Range (0)OFF, 10 ~ 1600A

Default 500A Step 1A

Phase pickup current. This value is primary current. Primary and secondary current is related CT ratio.

Primary current = Secondary current × CT ratio.

2) As above screen, to move to Phase, use [] [] key and press [ENT] key to move into value column.

3) Use [] [] keys and [] [] keys to change a new value. Press [ENT] key, then you see the changed Phase value.

NOTE : You must save all changed values at ”Setting Save” menu.

[PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 500 Ground: 250[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]



5.3.5. Setting Save To save all changed values, steps are as follows; Move to “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY / SAVE SETTING” and follow each

step as below(“Global Setting” menu and “Group Setting/ Alternate or EditBank” menu has “*.Setting Save” menu).

MAIN MENU / PRIMARY SETTING / SAVE SETTING

①

②

③

④

① To save a changed set value, press [ENT] button.

② Enter Passcode and press [ENT] button. If Passcode is correct, ③screen appears; otherwise ② screen appears again.

③ If the changed value is set successfully, ③ screen is displayed for short period.

If there is no change value and select “*. SAVE SETTING”, then,

screen ④ is displayed.

NOTE : Changed set value is applied if the changed set value is saved. If changed set value saving is cancelled, previous value is remained.

* NOTHING CHANGED *

[SAVE SETTING] * SUCCESS *

ENTER PASSCODE 1

0000

SETTING CHANGED

PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE



6. GLOBAL SETTING Place the curser in “GLOBAL SETTING”, press [ENT] button, it is moved to GLOBAL SETTING. This menu has sub-menu as below.

NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE

SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value saved message’.

6.1. System

Place the curser on “SYSTEM” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu. In this menu, elements related with SYSTEM, are set and it has sub-menu as below.

CAUTION : This setting change may influence metering and whole system, precaution is

requested.

[SYSTEM] >1.POWER LINE 2.CURRENT SENSING 3.VOLTAGE SENSING 4.CB OPENING TIME 5.GAS SENSOR TYPE 6.TIME ZONE

[GLOBAL SETTING] >1.SYSTEM 2.COMMUNICATION 3.EVENT RECODER 4.MONITERING 5.LOOP CONTROL 6.PASSCODE 7.PLC 8.OTHERS *.SAVE SETTING



6.1.1. Power Line Place a cursor on “POWER LINE” in SYSTEM menu, and press [ENT] button, it is moved in this menu. Set the power system information where this control is installed.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Frequency

Range 50, 60

Default 60* Step ~

Select the nominal power system frequency. This value is used as a default to set the optimal digital sampling rate. It is set before product delivery in accordance with spec.

NOTE : The default value of this setting can vary according to

the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Reference Voltage

Range A, B, C, NONE

Default A Step ~

Reference voltage set. Beside of Hard wire connection, phase connection shall be adjusted by software as well.

NOTE : Depending on settings of 'Reference voltage' and

'Phase Rotation' bushing connection is changed. Refer to ‘Table 6-1. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and phase rotation’.

[POWER LINE] >Ref.Voltage: A Phase Rotation: ABC [A/B/C/NONE]

[POWER LINE] >Frequency: 60 Ref.Voltage: A [50/60Hz]



Table 6-1. Phase selection according to the reference voltage and phase rotation. Setting

Display

Source Side: 1V Ref.Voltage A Ref.Voltage B Ref.Voltage C

Rotation : ABC

Rotation : ACB

Rotation : ABC

Rotation : ACB

Rotation : ABC

Rotation : ACB

A(R)/IA

V11(V21)

/I01

V11(V21)

/I01

V12(V22)

/I02

V12(V22)

/I02

V13(V23)

/I03

V13(V23)

/I03

B(S)/IB

V12(V22)

/I02

V13(V23)

/I03

V13(V23)

/I03

V11(V21)

/I01

V13(V21)

/I01

V13(V22)

/I02

C(T)/IC

V13(V23) /I03

V12(V22)

/I02

V11(V21)

/I01

V13(V23)

/I03

V12(V22)

/I02

V11(V21)

/I01

Setting

Display

Source Side: 2V Ref.Voltage A Ref.Voltage B Ref.Voltage C

Rotation : ABC

Rotation : ACB

Rotation : ABC

Rotation : ACB

Rotation : ABC

Rotation : ACB

A(R)/IA

V21(V11)

/I01

V21(V11)

/I01

V22(V12)

/I02

V22(V12)

/I02

V23(V13)

/I03

V23(V13)

/I03

B(S)/IB

V22(V12)

/I02

V23(V13)

/I03

V23(V13)

/I03

V21(V11)

/I01

V21(V11)

/I01

V22(V12)

/I02

C(T)/IC

V23(V13) /I03

V22(V12)

/I02

V21(V11)

/I01

V23(V13)

/I03

V22(V12)

/I02

V21(V11)

/I01

NOTE

1. V11 and I01 are the input terminal of voltage and current on control panel.

2. () indicates Load side.

3. When Source Side set 2V, current value is calculated in software with changed CT polarity.

4. CT polarity can be adjustable.

When Reference Voltage set None, depending on Phase Rotation, normal voltage and negative voltage are calculated in opposite. It does not influence any others.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / POWER LINE / Phase Rotation

Range ABC, ACB

Default ABC Step ~

Select the phase rotation of the power system.

[POWER LINE] Ref.Voltage: A>Phase Rotation: ABC[ABC/ACB]



6.1.2. Current Sensing Place a cursor in “CURRENT SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu. This Setting group is critical for all over-current protection features that have settings specified in multiples of CT rating. When the relay is ordered, the phase, ground, and sensitive ground CT inputs must be specified as 1 Amp. As the phase CTs are connected in wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (Ia + Ib + Ic = Neutral Current = 3 I0) is used as the input for protection of the neutral over-current. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive earth input may be used. In this case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. For additional details on CT connections, refer to (see 13.11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram).

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Ratio

Range 1 ~ 2000

Default 1000 Step 1

Set phase CT ratio.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / GND CT Ratio

Range 1 ~ 5000

Default 1000 Step 1

Set ground CT ratio.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Ratio

Range 0(OFF), 0.1 ~ 1000.0

Default 1000.0 Step 0.1

Set sensitive earth CT ratio.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / PHA CT Polarity

Range Forward, Reverse

Default Forward Step ~

Set phase CT pole direction.

[CURRENT SENSING] CSEF CT Ratio: 133.3 >PHA CT Pol’: FOR [FOR/REV]

[CURRENT SENSING] >SEF CT Ratio:1000.0 >PHA CT Pol’: FOR 0(OFF),0~1000.0:0.1

[CURRENT SENSING] >PHA CT Ratio: 1000 >GND CT Ratio: 1000 [1~5000:1]

[CURRENT SENSING] >PHA CT Ratio: 1000 GND CT Ratio: 1000 [1~2000:1]



GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CURRENT SENSING / SEF CT Polarity

Range Forward, Reverse

Default Forward Step ~

Set sensitive earth CT pole direction.

6.1.3. Voltage Sensing Place a curser in “VOLTAGE SENSING” and press [ENT] button, it is moved to this menu. ETR300-R has 2(Two) voltage connectors. Voltage connectors are receiving Source side and Load side line voltages. To measure received voltages, set Voltage connectors’ Connect Type, 2nd Nominal Voltage and VT Ratio. With Line VTs installed, the ETR300-R can be used to perform voltage measurements, power calculations, and directional control of over-current elements. And with Line VTs installed, the ETR300-R can be used to perform synchronism elements.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Connect Type

Range NONE, WYE, DELTA

Default WYE Step ~

Select the voltage type of system that input to 1V(1st Voltage Connector) .

NONE : VT non installed. Select NON if Voltage Sensing item is not used.

WYE : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is Y-Type, Select WYE. DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V 2nd(V)

Range 2.00 ~ 350.00V

Default 4.00 Step 0.01V

Enter the second rated voltage(V) of 1V(1st Voltage connector). This setting is the second rated voltage that entered in the relay about line rated voltage.

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V 2nd(V): 4.00>1V Ratio: 3300.0[2.00~350.00:0.01V]

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V CON-Type: WYE>1V 2nd(V): 4.00[NONE/WYE/DELTA]

[CURRENT SENSING] CPHA CT Pol’: FOR>SEF CT Pol’: FOR[FOR/REV]



GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 1V Ratio

Range 10.0 ~ 6500.0


Enter the VT rated rate of 1V(1st Voltage connector).

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Connect Type

Range NONE, WYE, DELTA

Default WYE Step ~

Select the voltage type of system that input to 2V(2nd Voltage Connector) .

NONE : VT non installed. Select NON if Voltage Sensing item is not used.

WYE : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is Y-Type, Select WYE. DELTA : If Voltage Connect Type of 2V is Δ-Type, Select DELTA.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V 2nd(V)

Range 2.00 ~ 350.00V

Default 4.00 Step 0.01V

Enter the second rated voltage(V) of 2V(2nd Voltage Connector). This setting is the second rated voltage that entered in the relay about line rated voltage.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V Ratio

Range 10.0 ~ 6500.0


Enter the VT Rated Rate of 2V(2nd Voltage Connector).

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V 2nd(V): 4.0 >2V Ratio: 3300.0 [10.0~6500.0:0.1]

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V 2nd(V): 4.00 >2V Ratio: 3300.0 [2.00~350.00:0.01V]

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V CON-Type: WYE 2V 2nd(V): 4.0 [NONE/WYE/DELTY]

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >1V 2nd(V): 4.0 >1V Ratio: 3300.0 [10.0~6500.0:0.1]



GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / 2V INS-Type

Range 3P, 1P-R, 1P-S, 1P-T

Default 3P Step ~

Insert the type of sensing voltage for the recloser body unit.

3P : Three phases voltage sensing installed 1P-R : One phase voltage sensing installed to the R phase of the

recloser body unit.

1P-S : One phase voltage sensing installed to the S phase of the recloser body unit.

1P-T : One phase voltage sensing installed to the T phase of the recloser body unit.

NOTE : When the voltage sensor to the load side is installed to

only one phase or none of the phase, the following functions performed by the voltage measurement are operated incorrectly if this setting is changed.

Synchronism Check

Interrupt, Sag and Swell Detection – PQM

Voltage Unbalance Detection – PQM

Under and Over Voltage Detection – PQM

Loop Control

Directional Control

Under and Over Voltage Protection

Live Line Detection

Phase Open/Loss Detection

Loss of Phase

Live Load Blocking

NOTE : The setting is supported from Ver. 3.8 of ETR300-R.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / VOLTAGE SENSING / Source Side

Range 1V, 2V

Default 1V Step ~

Select the Source side of System. According to the selected value the indication of “MAIN MENU/ METERING/ VOLTAGE” change. In the VOLTAGE screen, indicate ABC in the Source Side, and RST in the Load Side.

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V Ratio: 3300.0>Source Side: 1V[1V/2V]

[VOLTAGE SENSING] >2V Ratio: 3300.0>2V INS-Type: 3P[3P/1P-R/1P-S/1P-S]



Setting Examples

Depending on voltage level, PT Ratio and secondary rate are set before delivery. For instance, 38kV level case, based on 33000V line, Ratio is set for 3300.0 : 1, and secondary is set for 5.77V. Ratio shall not be changed. When reference voltage changes, secondary shall also be changed. In case that system voltage is 34000V, PT Ratio remains the same 3300.0, but secondary voltage shall be changed to 5.95V. Below table shows, PT ratio and Secondary voltage setting depending on System voltage level.

Table 6-2. PT Ratio and 2nd Voltage Relation

System Voltage Level Reference line Voltage PT Ratio Setting 2nd Voltage Setting

38kV 33000V(L-L)/√3 3300.0 5.77V

27kV 22863V(L-L)/√3 3300.0 4V

15kV 10000V(L-L)/√3 3300.0 1.75V

6.1.4. CB Opening Time Place the curser on “CB OPENING TIME” in SYSTEM menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. Recloser’s complete opening time is calculated as follows. Total CB Clearing Time = Relay Release Time + CB Trip Time (CB Opening Time + Arcing Time) To apply TCC time to the complete opening time, CT trip time shall be considered.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / CB OPENING TIME

Range 0.000 ~ 1.000 sec

Default 0.016 Step 0.001 sec

※. EXEMPLE) In case that TCC value applied to ERT300-R is 1.00sec and CB Trip Time is 30msec + 10msec, actual circuit breaker’s Clearing Time is 1.00 + 30msec + 10msec = 1.04sec. The difference between TCC value and actual Clearing Time, 40msec needs to be set for CB Trip Time(40msec). This setting time compensates CB Trip Time.

[CB OPENING TIME] >Time: 0.016 [0.000~1.000:0.001s]



6.1.5. GAS SENSOR TYPE Place the curser on “GAS SENSOR TYPE” in SYSTEM menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / GAS SENSOR TYPE

Range NONE, TYPE1, TYPE2

Default NONE Step -

This is set in accordance with tank before delivery. It is set depending on tank insulation method. If tank is gas insulated type, it shall take TYPE1 or TYPE2. NONE : It means non-gas type, Solid insulated type.

6.1.6. TIME ZONE Place the curser on “TIME ZONE” in SYSTEM menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This setting is used to calculate out local time by using received time information from Time Synchronization Module(GPS or IRIG). This menu is used when Time Synchronization Module option is installed. Select standard time zone for user county. Sync time(sec) is used periodic time synch by Time Synchronization module when Time Synchronization module is installed.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Sign

Range +, -

Default + Step -

Display the receive UTC time and the local time off-set direction. Local time is faster than UTC time, select “+”, otherwise, select “-“.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Hour

Range 0~23 hour(s)

Default 9 Step 1 hour

Set the difference of “Hour” between UTC time and Local time.

[TIME ZONE] >Sign: +>Hour: 9[0~23:1hr]

[TIME ZONE] >Sign: + Hour: 9[+/-]

[GAS SENSOR TYPE] >Type: NONE [NONE/TYPE1/TYPE2]



GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Min

Range 0~59 min

Default 0 Step 1 min

Set the difference of “Minute” between UTC and Local time.

NOTE Korea Local time is 9 hour faster than UTC time, set it as follows (+9:00); Sing : +, Hour : 9, Min : 0 The default value of above settings can vary according to the option type.

NOTE If the setting values associated with GMT are set up incorrectly, the problems can be happened as follows.

- If the "Reference Time Type" is set to be GMT, the time of the internal clock in ETMFC101_N can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.

- If the time type of the DNP communication event is set to be GMT, the time of event transmitted is not correct.

GLOBAL SETTING / SYSTEM / TIME ZONE / Time Syn’ Ref

Range LOCAL, GMT

Default GMT Step ~

Set Reference Time Type when time need in a device is synchronized with Time Synchronization module.

NOTE : The setting is supported from version 3.6 of ETR300-R.

NOTE In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if “GPS/IRIG?” setting is set with "NO" in “GLOCBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION” menu, the time synchronization module is not able to be used.

[TIME ZONE] >Min: 0 >Tims Syn’ Ref: GMT [LOCAL/GMT]

[TIME ZONE] >Min: 0 >Sync Time: 60 [0~59:1min]



6.2. Communication

Place the curser on “COMMUNIATION” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Communication and its related elements are sent in this menu and it has sub-menu as below.

6.2.1. Protocol Setup Place the curser on “PROTOCOL SETUP” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Communication protocol of ETR300-R is set and it has sub-menus as below.

ETR300-R supports DNP3, IEC60870-5-101, IEC60870-5-104 and MODBOUS Communication protocol. . This menu may be changed depending on User’s request. Each protocol setting details are as below.

[PROTOCOL SETUP] >1.DNP3 S1 2.DNP3 S2 3.IEC870-5-101 4.IEC870-5-104 5.MODBUS

[COMMUNICATION] >1.PROTOCOL SETUP 2.PORT SETUP 3.DIALUP MODEM 4.EVENT&ETC SETUP 5.FTP FILE TRANSFER*.SAVE SETTINGS



6.2.1.1. DNP3 Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the DNP3 through communication port1, port2, port3 or port4. For details, refer to “DNP3 Protocol Technical Manual” Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 S1 or DNP3 S2” to select setting for DNP3 Protocol. Setting items of “DNP3 S1” and “DNP3 S2” menu are same as following.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Function

Range DISABLE, ENABLE

Default SLAVE1 : ENABLE

Step ~ SLAVE2 : DISABLE

To select DNP3 Slave1 or Slave2, set ENABLE.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / COM Port

Range PORT1, PORT2, PORT3

Default SLAVE1 : PORT1

Step ~ SLAVE2 : PORT2

Select DNP3 communication port.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L Confirm

Range NO, YES, SOME

Default SOME Step ~

Choose whether Data Link Confirm is used or not.

NO : Data Link Confirm is not used. YES : Data Link Confirm is used. SOME : Data Link Confirm is used in case of Multi-frame.

When Data Link Confirm use-setting, it shall be set as Host setting. If the setting is different from Host setting, the communication may be failed due to Data Link Reset.

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >D/L Confirm: SOME >D/L FrameDly: 100 [NO/YES/SOME]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >COM Port: PORT1 D/L Confirm: SOME [PORT1 – PORT4]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Function: ENABLE COM Port: PORT1

[DISABLE/ENABLE]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L FrameDly

Range 10 ~ 5000 msec

Default 100 Step 10 msec

Set Data Link frame Delay Time. In case that D/L Confirm setting is OFF, it means Frame Interval time when multi-frame occurs.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L Retries

Range 0, 1, 2

Default 0 Step 1

Enter the number of retries that will be issued for a given data link layer.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / D/L Timeout

Range 1 ~ 255 sec

Default 10 Step 1 sec

Set a waiting time between Data Link Frame transfer till to receive Data Link Confirm(ACK) of Master. If there is no Data Link Confirm receiving and Data Link retry is available, ETR300-R will send Data Link Frame again.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / A/L Timeout

Range 1 ~ 255 sec

Default SLAVE1 : 15

Step 1 sec SLAVE2 : 30

Set a waiting time for Slave Application to receive A/L Confirm(ACK) from Master Application, in case that Confirm is requested during Data transfer from Slave Application to Master Application.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Master Addr

Range 0 ~ 65534

Default 65534 Step 1

Enter the master station address.

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master Addr: 65534DNP Address: 1

[0~65534:1]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >A/L Timeout: 15 Master Addr: 65534[1~255:1s]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >D/L Timeout: 10 A/L Timeout: 15[1~255:1s]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >D/L Retries: 0 D/L Timeout: 10

[0~2:1]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >D/L Confirm: SOME>D/L FrameDly: 100[10~5000:10ms]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / DNP Address

Range 0 ~ 65534

Default SLAVE1 : 1

Step 1 SLAVE2 : 0

Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / SBO Time

Range 1 ~ 255 sec


Set a time interval between Select Function and Operate Function. If no operation command during set time, Select command is cancelled.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Init Unsol


Default ENABLE Step ~

Select a use of re-start Initial Unsolicited Response.

ENABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is transferred.

DISABLE : On Power Up, Initial Unsolicited Response Message is not transferred.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Unsol Time

Range 0 ~ 60 sec


Set a delay time of reporting, in case Unsolicited mode event is occurred. Reporting is conducted if no new Event is occurred within the time.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Unsol Type

Range NOTRIG, PERIOD

Default NOTRIG Step -

NOTRG: If there is no more event occurrence during setting unsolicited time after the last event occurs, the event data is transmitted.

PERIOD: Unsolicited message is sent to a master with whole event data occurring after setting unsolicited time starting and elapsing when the first event occurs.

[DNP3 SLAVE1] Unsol Time: 5 >Unsol Type: NOTRIG [NOTRIG/PERIOD]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Unsol Time: 5 >Unsol Type: NOTRIG [0~60:1s]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Init Unsol: ENABLE Unsol Time: 5 [DISABLE/ENABLE]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >SBO Time: 15 Init Unsol: ENABLE [1~255:1s]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >DNP Address: 1 SBO Time: 15

[0~65534:1]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Unsol Retries

Range 0, 1, 2

Default SLAVE1 : 0

Step 1 SLAVE2 : 1

Set the Unsol Retries when there isn’t a confirm abouth Unsol message from the main device.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Class 1



Select whether to send Unsolicited Response or not to master in case that Event is occurred in Class1.




Select whether to send Unsolicited Response to master in case Event is occurred in Class2.




Select whether to send Unsolicited Response to master, in case Event is occurred in Class3.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / TCP/UDP Select

Range TCP, UDP

Default TCP Step ~

Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port3(Ethernet).

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / TCP Port

Range 0 ~ 65535


Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETR300R for TCP communication.

[DNP3 SLAVE1] TCP/UDP Select: TCP>TCP Port : 20000[TCP/UDP]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP TCP Port : 20000[TCP/UDP]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Class 2: ENABLE>Class 3: ENABLE[DISABLE/ENABLE]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Class 1: ENABLE>Class 2: ENABLE[DISABLE/ENABLE]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Class 1: ENABLE Class 2: ENABLE[DISABLE/ENABLE]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Unsol Type: NOTRIG>Unsol Retries : 0[0~2:1]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / UDP Port

Range 0 ~ 65535


Set the TCP/IP Port number of ETR300R for UDP communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Master IP Oct 1~4

Range 0 ~ 255

Default 0* Step 1

Select the IP Address for DNP3 Communication. IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

① ② ③ ④

Master IP Oct1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④


the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / keep Alive Check Tm

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600 sec

Default 4 Step 1sec

Set the time period that check the communication connecting status during the idle status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Fragment Size

Range 64 ~ 2048

Default 2048 Step 1

Set the size of DNP fragment.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ DNP3 / Time Req(m)

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 30000 min

Default OFF Step 1

Set Time Sync in order to synchronize internal system clock with time received from master station.

NOTE : The setting is supported from version 3.6 of ETR300-R.

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Fragment Size: 2048 >Time Req(m): OFF [0(OFF),1~30000:1]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] K-Alv Check Tm: 4 >Fragment Size: 2048 [64~2048:1]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master IP Oct4: 0 >K-Alv Check Tm: 4 [O(OFF),1~600:1s]

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >Master IP Oct1: 0 >Master IP Oct2: 0 >Master IP Oct3: 0 >Master IP Oct4: 0

[DNP3 SLAVE1] >UDP Port : 20001 Master IP Oct1: 192 [TCP/UDP]



6.2.1.2. IEC60870-5-101 Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-101 through communication port1, port2 or port3. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101” to select setting for IEC60870-5-101.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Function


Default DISABLE Step ~

Set an use of IEC60870-5-101.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ COM Port


Default PORT1 Step ~

Select a port to use IEC60870-5-101 communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Address

Range 1 ~ 65535

Default 1 Step 1

Enter the slave(ETR300-R) address for IEC60870-5-101 communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ ASDU Addr

Range 0~65535

Default 0 Step 1

Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Cyclic Period

Range 1~60000 sec


Select the Cyclic Period. It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.

[IEC60870-5-101] >ASDU Addr: 0>Cyclic Period: 60[1~60000:1]

[IEC60870-5-101] >ASDU Addr: 0>Cyclic Period: 60[0~65535:1]

[IEC870-5-101] >COM Port: PORT1>Address : 1[1~65535:1]

[IEC870-5-101] >Function: DISABLE>COM Port: PORT1[PORT1/PORT2/PORT3]

[IEC870-5-101] >Function: DISABLECOM Port: PORT1

[DISABLE/ENABLE]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Event Period

Range 0~255 sec

Default 15 Step 1sec

Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Retries

Range Applicable for lower than Ver 3.6 of ETR300-R : 0 ~ 2

Applicable for Ver 3.6 or higher of ETR300-R : 0 ~ 255

Default 0 Step 1

Set the Data retires number.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Conf. Timeout

Range 1 ~ 255 sec


Set the wait time till receive the Data Confirm (ACK) of master after transfer the Data. If there isn’t the Confirm during this setting time and Data retries is available, ETR300 transfers the Data again.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Max Poll Tim

Range 1 ~ 255 sec


Set the Data Polling period time.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ ADSU Addr Size*

Range 1 ~ 2

Default 2 Step 1

Enter the size of cause of transmission.

[IEC60870-5-101] >ADSU Addr Size: 2 >Link Confirm:ALWAYS [1~2:1]

[IEC60870-5-101] >Conf.Timeout: 10 >Max Poll Time: 10 [1~255:1s]

[IEC60870-5-101] >Retries: 0 >Conf.Timeout: 10 [1~255:1s]

[IEC60870-5-101] >Retries: 0 Conf.Timeout: 10

[0~2:1]

[IEC60870-5-101] >Cyclic Period: 60 >Event Period: 15 [0~255:1s]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Confirm*

Range NEVER, ALWAYS

Default ALWAYS Step ~

Enter the Link layer confirm mode.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Link Addr Size*

Range 1 ~ 2

Default 1 Step 1

Enter the size of link address.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame Size*

Range 0 ~ 261

Default 261 Step 1

Enter the maximum size of received frame.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Rx Frame TO*



Enter the maximum amount of time to wait for a complete frame after receiving the frame sync.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Tx Frame Size*

Range 0 ~ 261

Default 261 Step 1

Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ COT Size*

Range 1 ~ 2

Default 1 Step 1

Enter the size of cause of transmission.

[IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1>IOA Size : 2[1~2:1]

[IEC60870-5-101] >Tx Frame Size: 261>COT Size : 1[0~261:1]

[IEC60870-5-101] >Rx Frame Size: 261>Rx Frame TO : 15[0(OFF),0~255:1s]

[IEC60870-5-101] >Link Addr Size: 1>Rx Frame Size: 261[0~261:1]

[IEC60870-5-101] >Link Addr Size: 1>Rx Frame Size: 261[1~2:1]

[IEC60870-5-101] >ADSU Addr Size: 2>Link Confirm:ALWAYS[NEVER/ALWAYS]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ IOA Size*

Range 1 ~ 3

Default 2 Step 1

Enter the size of information object address.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ One Ch Response*

Range NO, YES

Default NO Step ~

This allows to send one character response instead of a fixed length NACK when no response data available.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Fram Repet’ TO*

Range 0(OFF), 1~255sec


Enter the time out for repetition of frames(or incremental application layer timeout).

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101 / Select Timeout*

Range 0(OFF), 1~255

Default 5 Step 1

Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CMD Termination*

Range NO, YES

Default YES Step ~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of commands other than set point commands.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ CSE Termination*

Range NO, YES

Default YES Step ~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set point commands.

[IEC60870-5-101] >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES [NO/YES]

[IEC60870-5-101] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES [NO/YES]

[IEC60870-5-101] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES [0(OFF),0~255:1]

[IEC60870-5-101] >One Ch Response: NO >Frame Repet’ TO: 30 [0(OFF),0~255:1s]

[IEC60870-5-101] >One Ch Response: NO >Frame Repet’ TO: 30 [NO/YES]

[IEC60870-5-101] >COT Size : 1 >IOA Size : 2 [1~3:1]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ Clock Sync’ Evt*

Range NO, YES

Default YES Step ~

Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ MSP Time-Tag**

Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~

Select whether a time tag format for single-point.

CP56 : The time tag format is CP56Time2a. CP24 : The time tag format is CP24Time2a.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ MIT Time-Tag**

Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~

Select whether a time tag format for integrated totals.


GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-101/ MME Time-Tag**

Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~

Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized value for general event except for fault current event.



Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~



[IEC60870-5-101] >MME Time-Tag: CP56>Flt Time-Tag: CP56[CP56,CP24]


[IEC60870-5-101] >MSP Time-Tag: CP56>MIT Time-Tag: CP56[CP56,CP24]


[IEC60870-5-101] >CSE Termination:YES>Clock Sync’ Evt:YES[NO/YES]



NOTE : 1. The above settings marked with * shall be Ver 3.6 or higher of ETR300-R to be

indicated. 2. In case ETR300 is the standard type, the above settings marked with ** shall be

Ver 3.9 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. 3. In case ETR300 is the External O/I option type, the above settings marked with **

shall be Ver 4.10 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated.

6.2.1.3. IEC60870-5-104 Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the IEC60870-5-104 through communication port3. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC60870-5-104” to select setting for IEC60870-5-104.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Function



Set an use of IEC60870-5-104 communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ COM Port

Range PORT3


Set a port for IEC60870-5-104 communication. It is fixed in PORT3.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ ASDU Addr

Range 0~65535

Default 0 Step 1

Select the Application Service Data Unit Address.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Cyclic Period

Range 1~60000 sec


Select the Cyclic Period. It is to set interval time between Point set for Cyclic.

[IEC60870-5-104] >ASDU Addr: 0 >Cyclic Period: 60 [1~60000:1]

[IEC60870-5-104] >COM Port: PORT3 >ASDU Addr: 0 [0~65535:1]

[IEC870-5-104] >Function: ON >COM Port: PORT3 [PORT1-PORT4]

[IEC870-5-104] >Function: DISABLE COM Port: PORT3

[DISABLE/ENABLE]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Time Out(t0)

Range 1~255 sec

Default 120 Step 1

Select the Timeout for connection establishment.


Range 1~255 sec

Default 15 Step 1

Select the Timeout for send or test APDUs.


Range 1~255 sec

Default 10 Step 1

Select the Timeout for acknowledgements in case of no data message ( t2<t1).


Range 1~255 sec

Default 20 Step 1

Select the Timeout for sending test frame in case of a long idle state.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Event Period

Range 0~255 sec

Default 15 Step 1

Select the delay time before events are sent. Single event or several events occur and then if new event is not generated during the delay time, the event(s) already generated is(are) sent to a Master.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ TCP Port No

Range 0 ~ 65535

Default 2404 Step 1

Set the TCP/IP Port of ETR300 for IEC60870-5-104 Protocol communication.

[IEC60870-5-104] >Event Period: 5>TCP Port No: 2404[01~65535:1]

[IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t3): 20>Event Period: 15[0~255:1s]

[IEC60870-5-104] >Time Out(t2): 10>Time Out(t3): 20[1~255:1s]



[IEC60870-5-104] >Cyclic Period: 60>Time Out(t0): 120[1~255:1s]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Rx Frame Size*

Range 0 ~ 255

Default 255 Step 1

Enter the maximum size of received frame.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Tx Frame Size*

Range 0 ~ 255

Default 255 Step 1

Enter the maximum size of transmitted frame.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104 / Select Timeout*

Range 0(OFF), 1~255

Default 5 Step 1

Enter the period after a previously received select will timeout.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ CMD Termination*

Range NO, YES

Default YES Step ~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of commands other than set point commands.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ CSE Termination*

Range NO, YES

Default YES Step ~

Select whether to send Activation Termination upon completion of set point commands.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ Clock Sync’ Evt*

Range NO, YES

Default YES Step ~

Select whether to generate spontaneous clock synchronization events

[IEC60870-5-104] >CSE Termination:YES >Clock Sync’ Evt:YES [NO/YES]

[IEC60870-5-104] >CMD Termination:YES >CSE Termination:YES [NO/YES]

[IEC60870-5-104] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES [NO/YES]

[IEC60870-5-104] >Select Timeout: 5 >CMD Termination:YES [0(OFF),0~255:1]

[IEC60870-5-104] >Rx Frame Size: 255 >Tx Frame Size: 255 [0~255:1]

[IEC60870-5-104] >Rx Frame Size: 255 >Tx Frame Size: 255 [0~255:1]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ MSP Time-Tag**

Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~

Select whether a time tag format for single-point.



Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ IEC870-5-104/ MME Time-Tag**

Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~

Select whether a time tag format for measured value and normalized value for general event except for fault current event.



Range CP56, CP24

Default CP56 Step ~



NOTE : 1. The above settings marked with * shall be Ver 3.6 or higher of ETR300-R to be

indicated. 2. In case ETR300 is the standard type, the above settings marked with ** shall be

Ver 3.9 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. 3. In case ETR300 is the External O/I option type, the above settings marked with **








6.2.1.4. MODBUS Protocol Setup

ETR300-R can be programmed for communication using the MODBUS through communication port1, port2 or port3. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS” to select setting for MODBUS Protocol.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Function



Set whether to use MODBUS communication or not.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ COM Port



Select MODBUS communication port.

GLOBAL SETTING/COMMUNICATION/PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ TCP/UDP Select

Range TCP, UDP

Default TCP Step ~

Select TCP or UDT communication at the use of Port3(Ethernet).

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS / TCP Port

Range 1 ~ 65535

Default 502 Step 1

Set TCP port number of ETR300-R.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS / UDP Port

Range 0 ~ 65535


Set UDP port number of ETR300-R.

[MODBUS] TCP Port: 502 >UDP Port: 20001 [0~65535:1]

[MODBUS] >TCP Port: 502 >UDP Port: 20001 [1~65535:1]

[MODBUS] >TCP/UDP Select: TCP >TCP Port: 502 [TCP/UDP]

[MODBUS] >Function: ON >COM Port: PORT3 [PORT1/PORT2/PORT3]

[MODBUS] >Function: DISABLE COM Port: PORT3

[DISABLE/ENABLE]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Slave Address

Range 1 ~ 254

Default 1 Step 1

Enter the Modbus address.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ MODBUS/ Tx Delay

Range 0.00(OFF), 0.01 ~ 300.00 sec

Default 0.05 sec Step 0.01

Delay time of sending Real data after RTS Signal is on.

6.2.2. Port Setup Place the curser on “PORT SETUP” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. ETR300-R communication port and related elements are set in this menu and it has sub-menu as below.

6.2.2.1. PORT1(232) Setup

ETR300-R side panel PORT1 and related elements are set. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1 (232)” to select setting for PORT1.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Baud Rate

Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps

Default 9600 Step ~

Select the baud rate for PORT1.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Parity Bit

Range NONE, ODD, EVEN

Default NONE Step ~

Select whether to use Parity Bit.

[PROT1(232)] Baud Rate: 1200>Parity Bit: NONE[NONE/ODD/EVEN]

[PROT1(232)] >Baud Rate: 9600 Parity Bit: NONE[1200 ~ 19200 bps]

[PORT SETUP] >1.PORT1(232) 2.PORT2(485) 3.PORT3(ETHERNET) 4.PORTF(232)

[MODBUS] Slave Address: 1>Tx Delay: 0.05[0.00~300.00:0.01]

[MODBUS] >Slave Address: 1Tx Delay: 0.05 [1~254:1]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Data Bit

Range 7, 8

Default 8 Step ~

Select the Data Bit.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Stop Bit

Range 1, 2

Default 1 Step ~

Select the Stop Bit.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ Modem Sel

Range 2W, 4W, DIAL, NONE

Default 4W Step ~

Select a modem for communication.

2W : 2 wire private line is used and continuously Carrier is monitored to control data flow by DCD(Data Carrier Detect).

4W : 4 wire private line is used and RTS(Request To Send) and CTS(clear to Send) signal are used to control data flow.

DIAL : Dial-Up1 modem is used. NONE : Not used.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ CTS Usage



Select whether to use CTS signal or not.

ENABLE : After confirm CTS signal is Asserted, transfer a data. DISABLE : Regardless of CTS signal, transfer a data.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ DCD Usage



Set whether to use DCD signal.

ENABLE : After confirming DCD signal is Deasserted, transfer a data. DISABLE: Regardless of DCD signal, transfer a data.

[PROT1(232)] >DCD Usage: DISABLE >RTS Usage: AUTO [DISABLE/ENABLE]

[PROT1(232)] >Modem Sel: 4W >CTS Usage: ENABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]

[PROT1(232)] >Modem Sel: 4W >CTS Usage: ON [2W/4W/DIAL/NONE]

[PROT1(232)] Data Bit: 8 >Stop Bit: 1 [1~2:1]

[PROT1(232)] Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 [7~8:1]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ RTS Usage

Range OFF, ON, AUTO

Default AUTO Step ~

ON : RTS signal of ETR300-R is always ON(Assert). OFF : RTS signal of ETR300-R is always OFF(Deassert). AUTO : On requesting data transfer to Modem, after RTS signal of

ETR300-R is on and after data transfer completion, RTS signal of ETR300-R is off.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ CTS CheckOut

Range 1 ~ 255 sec


Set a waiting time that waits Modems confirmation on RTS signal which informs that ETR300-R is ready to transfer a data. If there is no CTS response within a set time, RTU confirms CTS Fail and does not transfer the data. It is available if ‘CTS Usage’ setting is ON.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ DCD CheckOut



Set a delay time of DCD signal check which determine modem status before sending RTS signal in 2 wire communication type. After a set time, if DCD signal is ON, ETR300-R does not transfer the data and treat it as DCD Fail. It is available if ‘DCD Usage’ setting is ON.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ TX PreDelay

Range 5 ~ 500 msec


Set a tx pre-delay time. It delayed TX signal after CTS signal check.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT1(232)/ TX PostDelay

Range 10 ~ 500 msec


Set a tx post-delay time. It delayed RTS off after TX finished.

[PROT1(232)] TX PreDelay: 10>TX PostDelay: 50[10~500:5ms]

[PROT1(232)] DCD CheckOut: 5000>TX PreDelay: 10[10~500:5ms]

[PROT1(232)] >CTS CheckOut: 2>DCD CheckOut: 5000[10~30000:5ms]

[PROT1(232)] >CTS CheckOut: 2>DCD CheckOut: 5000[1~255:1s]

[PROT1(232)] >DCD Usage: OFF>RTS Usage: AUTO[OFF/ON/AUTO]



6.2.2.2. PORT2(485) Setup

Related elements with PORT2 in side panel of ETR300-R are set. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2 (485)” to select setting for PORT2.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Baud Rate

Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps

Default 9600 Step ~

Select the baud rate for PORT2.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Parity Bit

Range NONE, ODD, EVEN

Default NONE Step ~

Set whether to use Parity Bit, and set a type.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Data Bit

Range 7, 8

Default 8 Step ~

Select the Data Bit.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Stop Bit

Range 1, 2

Default 1 Step ~

Select the Stop Bit.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ Line Type

Range RS422, RS485

Default RS422 Step ~

Select a physical port for communication.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT2(485)/ CA Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 240.00


Set a delay time from data reced till transferring a reply data.

[PROT2(485)] >Line Type: RS422 >CA Delay: 1.00 [0.00~240.00:0.01]

[PROT2(485)] >Line Type: RS422 CA Delay: 1.00 [RS422/RS485]

[PROT2(485)] Data Bit: 8 >Stop Bit: 1 [1~2:1]

[PROT2(485)] Parity Bit: NONE >Data Bit: 8 [7~8:1]

[PROT2(485)] Baud Rate: 1200 >Parity Bit: NONE [NONE/ODD/EVEN]

[PROT2(485)] >Baud Rate: 9600 Parity Bit: NONE [1200 ~ 19200 bps]



6.2.2.3. PORT3(EHTERNET) Setup

Related elements with PORT3 in side panel of ETR300-R are set. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORT3 (ETHERNET)” to select setting for PORT3.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ IP Addr Oct1 ~ 4

Range 0 ~ 255

Default 0* Step 1

Select the IP Address for ETR300-R. IP Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

① ② ③ ④

IP Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④


the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ Gateway Oct1 ~ 4

Range 0 ~ 255

Default 0* Step 1

Select the Gateway Address. Gateway Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

① ② ③ ④

Gateway Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④


the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ SubnetMask Oct1 ~ 4

Range 0 ~ 255

Default 0* Step 1

Select the Subnet Mask Address for ETR300-R. Subnet Mask Address : 192.xxx.xxx.xxx

① ② ③ ④

Subnet Mask Addr´1,2,3,4 is ①,②,③,④


the option type.

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >SubnetMask Oct1: 0 SubnetMask Oct2: 0 SubnetMask Oct3: 0SubnetMask Oct4: 0

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >Gateway Oct1: 0 Gateway Oct2: 0 Gateway Oct3: 0Gateway Oct4: 0

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >IP Addr Oct1: 0 IP Addr Oct2: 0 IP Addr Oct3: 0IP Addr Oct4: 0



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ keep Alive Function



Select whether to use or not the Ethernet communication connecting status check function.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ k-Alv Idle T


Default 4 Step 1sec

If Idle status is maintained during the setting time, check the communication connecting maintainance status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ k-Alv Interval


Default 2 Step 1sec

After checking the communication connecting status, if there isn’t any reply during the setting time, check again the status.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PROTOCOL SETUP/ PORT3/ k-Alv Interval

Range 0~255

Default 3 Step 1

Check the communication connecting maintainance status as much as the setting number. If there isn’t a respond, take as communication fail and close the communication connection.

6.2.2.4. PORTF(232) Setup

Related elements in front panel of ETR300-R are set. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORTF (232)” to select setting for PORTF.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ PORT SETUP/ PORTF(232)/ Baud Rate

Range 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200bps

Default 38400 Step ~

Select the baud rate for PORTF.

[PROTF(232)] >Baud Rate: 38400 [1200 ~ 115200 bps]

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >K-Alv Interval: 2 >K-Alv Retry: 3 [0~255:1]

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >K-Alv Interval: 2 >K-Alv Retry: 3 [0~600:1s]

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >K-Alv Func: ENABLE >K-Alv Idle T: 4 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

[PORT3(ETHERNET)] >K-Alv Func: ENABLE >K-Alv Idle T: 3.00 [DISABLE/ENABLE]



6.2.3. Dialup Modem Setup Place the curser on “DIALUP MODEM” in COMMUNICATION menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. ETR300-R supports a Hayes compatible Modem on Port 1(232) for remote dial up access using DNP3. For details, refer to “DNP3 Protocol Technical Manual”. DIAL MODEM 1 menu has the sub-menu as below.

6.2.3.1. Settup

Calling String In order to set “Calling String”, move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/

COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIAL MODEM1/ CALLING STRING”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING STRING

Range ATD, ATDT, ATDP

Default ATD Step ~

Set to use Dial-Up modem use. Select a dial string one among them.

ATD : Default Dial Type(Already set in modem(Default Dial type) ATDT : Tone Dial ATDP : Pulse Dial

Calling Number Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIAL

MODEM1/ CALLING NUMBER”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CALLING NUMBER

Range ~

Default ~ Step ~

Insert call number to call to. [Modem(Master station) phone number]. Total 16 digits shall be used from the first digit space and empty space shall be filled up by ‘X’.

[CALLING NUMBER] >CN:0123456789XXXXXX [! ~ z]

[CALLING STRING] >CS: #### [! ~ z]

[DIALUP MODEM 1] >1.CALLING STRING 2.CALLING NUMBER 3.INITIAL STRING 4.CONNECTION



Initial String Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIAL

MODEM1 / INITIAL STRING”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ INITIAL STRING

Range ~

Default AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0 &D2 +CRM=129

Step ~

Modem can be initialized by inserting total 30 figures of number, character, space or special character. ETR300-R should be reset before making a phone call(connection).

NOTE : Continuous double Space or ‘/’ shall ignore next String.

Connection Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ DIAL

MODEM1 / CONNECTION”

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Cmd Res’ TO

Range 0 ~ 255 sec


Setting the Command response waiting time. If there is no response from a modem during setting time, it is considered as a communication failure after the setting time and the status of modem failure is maintained.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Connect TO

Range 0 ~ 255 sec


Setting the Modem connection waiting time. If there is no connection during setting time, it is considered as a connection failure after the setting time, the status of modem failure is maintained.

[CONNECT PARAMETER] >Cmd Res’ TO: 2 >Connect TO: 30 >Idle Time: 60

[CONNECT PARAMETER] >Cmd Res’ TO: 2 >Connect TO: 30 >Idle Time: 60

[INITIAL STRING] >IS: AT&C1 Q1 E0 M0 &D2 +CRM=129 [spase ~ z]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ DIALUP MODEM/ CONNECTION/ Idle Time

Range 0 ~ 255 sec

Default 60sec Step 1 sec

Setting the Modem connection close time. During setting time, the connection is closed after the setting time.

6.2.4. Event & Etc Setup Place the curser on “EVENT&ETC” in COMMUNICATIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. In this menu, sets the items used in common among the ETR300-R communication protocol setting items.

Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP” to select setting for EVENT&ETC SETUP.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP/ AEvt Method

Range OFF, TH, DB, BOTH

Default OFF Step ~

This setting value is applied only to the AI point with vitalized “Event Active: in DNP point map.

OFF : AI point event is not occurred. TH : Event is occurred when the AI point data is over or less than

Threshold value.

DB : AEvent is occurred when the AI data change value is over the Deadband value

BOTH : TH and DB all used. Use the ETR300 interface program to setting the “Event Active”

activation or desactivation of AI point, the Threshold value and Deadband value.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP / AEvt Skip at Ft

Range NO, YES

Default NO Step ~

Determine whether Threshold and Deadband AI event is generated during Fault pickup.

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] AEvt Method: OFF>AEvt Skip at Ft: NO[NO/YES]

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AEvt Method: OFF AEvt Skip at Ft: NO[OFF/TH/DB/BOTH]

[CONNECT PARAMETER] >Cmd Res’ TO: 2>Connect TO: 30>Idle Time: 60



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP / Daily Max I



Select the [DISABLE/ENABLE] of Daily Maximum Load Current transmission.

DISABLE : Do not process Daily Maximum Load Current Event.. ENABLE : Process Daily Maximum Load Current.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ EVENT&ETC SETUP / Flt ‘I’ Evt

Range NO, YES, 1SHOT

Default YES Step ~

NO : Do not send the all Fault Current Sequence to Event. YES : Send all Fault Current Sequence to Event. 1SHOT : Send the first Sequence Fault Current of Fault Sequence

to Event.

NOTE : The Fault Current occurrence time of each Sequence is when becomes no voltage after experience the Fault Current.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ Aver. Load Calc T

Range 1/2/3/4/5/6/10/12/15/20/30 min

Default 15 Step ~

Set the time interval for the calculation of average load current.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ BI Queue size

Range 32, 64, 128, 256

Default Applicable for lower than Ver 3.5 of ETR300-R : 32

Applicable for Ver 3.5 or higher of ETR300-R : 256

Set the binary queue size.

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >BI Queue size: 256 BI Evt Mode: ALL >[32/64/128/256]

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Flt ‘I’ Evt: YES >Aver.Load Calc T:15 >1~6/10/12/15/20/30m

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >Daily Max I:DISABLE >Flt ‘I’ Evt: YES [NO/YES/1SHOT]

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] AEvt Skip at Ft: NO >Daily Max I:DISABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ BI Evt Mode

Range ALL, LAST

Default ALL Step ~

Set the binary event mode.

ALL : all status is buffed for same point. LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Queue size

Range 32, 64, 128, 256



Set the analog queue size.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ AI Evt Mode

Range ALL, LAST

Default ALL Step ~

Set the analog event mode.

ALL : all analog is buffed for same point. LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ CI Queue size

Range 32, 64, 128, 256



Set the counter queue size.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ CI Evt Mode

Range ALL, LAST

Default ALL Step ~

Set the counter event mode.

ALL : all counter is buffed for same point. LAST : Only last event is buffed for same point.

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] CI Queue size: 32>CI Evt Mode: ALL>[ALL/LAST]

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >CI Queue size: 32>CI Evt Mode: ALL[32/64/128/256]

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] AI Queue size: 32>AI Evt Mode: ALL>[ALL/LAST]

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >AI Queue size: 256AI Evt Mode: ALL[32/64/128/256]

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] BI Queue size: 32>BI Evt Mode: ALL>[ALL/LAST]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ Time Syn’Type

Range LOCAL, GMT

Default LOCAL Step ~

Set Reference Time Type. It signifies the time data type when Time Synching with the master station.

NOTE : This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated with GMT(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the time internal clock in ETR300-R can be changed incorrectly at time synchronization.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ Time Tag Type

Range LOCAL, GMT

Default LOCAL Step ~

Set the time type for event recorders in DNP Communication.

NOTE : This setting is set to be GMT and the setting values associated with GMT(in “TIME ZONE” menu) are set up incorrectly, the time of event transmitted is not correct.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ ANALOG EVENT/ CI Frz Period

Range OFF(0), 1 ~ 60000 min

Default OFF Step 1 min

Set the period to freez counter by itself.

NOTE : 1. In case ETR300 is the standard type, this setting shall be

Ver 3.9 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. 2. In case ETR300 is the External O/I option type, this setting


[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >Time Tag Type:LOCAL >CI Frz Period: OFF >[OFF,1~60000m]

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] Time Syn’Type:LOCAL >Time Tag Type:LOCAL [LOCAL/GMT]

[EVENT&ETC SETUP] >Time Syn’Type:LOCAL Time Tag Type:LOCAL [LOCAL/GMT]



6.2.5. File Transfer Setup In this menu, sets about the file transfer. These are applied equally to DNP3.0 SLAVE 1 and DNP3.0 SLAVE2 Protocol. Move to “MAIN MENU/ GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TREANSFER” to select setting for file transfer.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Mode-R

Range DNP, FTPC, FTPS, USER

Default DNP Step ~

Select the protocol for file transfer.

DNP: Read the file in DNP protocol method. FTPC : Read the file in FTP Client method. FTPS : Read the file in FTP Sever method. USER : Read the file in the user’s method.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Mode-W

Range DNP, FTPC, FTPS, USER

Default DNP Step ~

Select the protocol for file transfer.

DNP: Write the file in DNP protocol method. FTPC : Write the file in FTP Client method. FTPS : Write the file in FTP Sever method. USER : Write the file in user’s method.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Dev

Range Space ~ ‘Z’

Default REC Step ~

Select the Device Type for FTP file classification..

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Dev.No


Default REC001 Step ~

Select the Device Number for FTP file classification

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP Dev: REC >FTD Dev.No: REC001[space ~ Z]

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP Dev: REC >FTD Dev.No: REC001[space ~ Z]

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP Mode-R: DNP>FTP Mode-W: DNP[DNP,FTPC,FTPS,USER]

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP Mode-R: DNP>FTP Mode-W: DNP[DNP,FTPC,FTPS,USER]



GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP ID


Default ENTEC Step ~

Set the ID of the device used for the connection with FTP.

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP PW


Default 1234 Step ~

Set the FTP connection password .

GLOBAL SETTING/ COMMUNICATION/ FTP FILE TRANSFER / FTP Passive



Select the FTP connecting method. If “ENABLE” is selected uses Passive method. If “DISABLE” is selected use Active method.

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP PW: 1234 >FTP Passive:DISABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP ID: ENTEC >FTP PW: 1234 [space ~ Z]

[FTP FILE TRANSFER] >FTP ID: ENTEC >FTP PW: 1234 [space ~ Z]



6.3. Event Recorder

Place the curser on “EVENT RECORDER” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Waveform and its related elements are set in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Capture

Range ON, OFF

Default ON Step ~

Set whether to use Wave capture.

GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / Wave S/R

Range 16, 32, 64, 128 sample

Default 64 sample Step ~

Select a number of sampling for wave capture. Captured wave cycle is 20cycles if 128 sampling is applied. Captured wave cycle is 40cycles if 64 sampling is applied. Number of cycle varies on the number of sampling selection.

GLOBAL SETTING / EVENT RECORDER / Wave Pre-Cycle

Range 1 ~ 5 cycle

Default 5 Step 1 cycle

Pre-cycle is to record(capture) a number of wave cycle before trigger occurring. Pre-cycle changes depending on sampling ratio. For instance, if pre-cycle is set for 5 cycle, when sampling number is 128, 5 cycle si applied, the sampling number is 68, pre-cycle is 10, 32 case, 20 pre-cycle is applied.

[EVENT RECORDER] Wave S/R: 128

>Wave Pre-Cycle: 5[1~5:1cycel]

[EVENT RECORDER] Wave Capture: OFF

>Wave S/R: 128[16/32/64/128]

[EVENT RECORDER] >Wave Capture: OFF>Wave S/R: 128[OFF/ON]



6.4. Monitoring

Place the curser on “MONITERING” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

6.4.1. Synchronism Check(25) Place the curser on “SYNCHROCHECK” in NOMITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. ETR300-R provides the manual close for the synchronism check element that synchronism voltages are within the programmed differentials of voltage magnitude, phase angle position, and frequency. If this feature is enabled, the synchronism check will be performed before local/remote close with the exception of automatic reclose for fault. When either or both of the synchronism check voltages are de-energized, the synchronism check can allow for local/remote close. If ETR300-R is the type of CVD, the synchronism check voltage input VL is connected to load side(VR phase) in recloser. The other synchronizing phase can be connected for phase-neutral voltage Vr, Vs or Vt; for phase-phase voltages Vab or Vcb. on load side in recloser. The synchronism check element in the following settings should be enabled.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Function

Range OFF, ON

Default OFF Step ~

If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = ON, the feature is operational.

[SYNCHROCHECK] >Function: OFF >D.V.Max: 0.50 [OFF/ON]

[MONITERING] >1.SYNCHROCHECK 2.OPERATION COUNT 3.CONTACT WEAR 4.BATTERY TEST 5.PQM 6.TD MONITOR



GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / D.V.Max

Range 0.00 ~ 1.25

Default 0.50 Step 0.01pu

Enter the dead line maximum voltage for synchronism check. Used to Prevent the synchronism check element for voltage below this level.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / L.V.Min

Range 0.00 ~ 1.25


Enter the live line minimum voltage for synchronism check. Used to activate the synchronism check element for voltage over this level.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.V.D(V)

Range 0.00 ~ 1.25


Enter the maximum voltage difference of the synchronism voltages. A voltage magnitude differential of the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.A.D(Deg)

Range Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : 0(OFF), 5~80 deg Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : 1 ~ 100 deg

Default 15 Step 1 deg

Enter the maximum angle difference of the synchronism voltages. An angular differential between the synchronism voltage angles below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / M.F.D(Hz)

Range 0.00 ~ 5.00 Hz

Default 2.00 Step 0.01 Hz

Enter the maximum frequency difference of the synchronism voltages. A frequency differential between the synchronism voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.

[SYNCHROCHECK] >M.A.D(Deg): 15>M.F.D(Hz): 2.00[0.00~5.00:0.01Hz]

[SYNCHROCHECK] M.V.D(V): 0.10>M.A.D(Deg): 15[0(OFF),5~80:5deg]

[SYNCHROCHECK] L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85>M.V.D: 0.10[0.00~1.25:0.01]

[SYNCHROCHECK] D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50>L.V.Min(xVT): 0.85[0.00~1.25:0.01]

[SYNCHROCHECK] Function: OFF>D.V.Max(xVT): 0.50[0.00~1.25:0.01]



GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Sync Phase

Range ALL, R(AB), S(CB), T(AC)

Default ALL Step ~

Select the synchronism check phase on load side.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SYNCHROCHECK / Time delay

Range 0.0 ~ 180.0sec

Default 1.0 Step 0.1sec

Set a delay time of synchronism check.

6.4.2. Operation Count Place the curser on “OPERATION COUN” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Recloser operation counter and monitoring elements are set in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Function

Range OFF, ON

Default OFF Step ~

Select whether to use Recloser operation count monitoring. If function is activated and operation counter is over Limit, Logic bit DIGTCNT is set. Logic bit can be used for Output or Alarm through Interface software.

Figure 6-1. DIGTCNT Diagram

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Limit

Range 1 ~ 20000


Set a number to alarm when Recloser operation number meets this set.

[OPERATION COUNT] >Function: OFF >Limit: 10000 [1~20000:1]

[OPERATION COUNT] >Function: OFF Limit: 10000 [OFF/ON]

[SYNCHROCHECK] >Sync Phase: ALL >Time : 1.0 [0.1~180.0:0.1s]

[SYNCHROCHECK] >M.F.D(Hz): 2.00 >Sync Phase: ALL [ALL/R(AB)/S(CB)/T]



GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OPERATION COUNT / Count set

Range 0 ~ 10000

Default 0 Step 1

It is to set the same operation number of circuit breaker. Set value is available after operation count is reset. Count reset refers to “MAINENANCE/ DATA

RESET / OPERATION COUNT or COUNT ALL”

6.4.3. Contact Wear Place the curser on “CONTACT WEAR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Recloser contact wear and monitoring elements are set in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Function

Range OFF, ON

Default OFF Step ~

Select whether to use Recloser contact wear monitoring.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Pickup(%)

Range 0.0 ~ 50.0 %

Default 20.0 Step 0.1 %

Set a pickup value to alarm when recloser contact wear reaches set value.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Rated Volt(kV)

Range 15, 27, 38

Default Note Step ~

Set the power line nominal voltage.

NOTE : The power line nominal voltage determines the Recloser type.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / Interrupt(kA)

Range 5.0 ~ 50.0 kA

Default 12.5 Step 0.1 kA

Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.

[CONTACT WEAR] Rated Volt(kV): 15>Interrupt(kA): 12.5[5.0~50.0:0.1kA]

[CONTACT WEAR] Pickup(%): 20.0>Rated Volt(kV): 38[15/27/38kV]

[CONTACT WEAR] >Function: OFF>Pickup(%): 20.0[0.0~50.0:0.1%]

[CONTACT WEAR] >Function: OFF Pickup(%): 20.0[OFF/ON]

[TRIP COUNTER] Limit: 10000>Count set: 0[0~10000:1]



GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / No. Max I

Range 1 ~ 999

Default 100 Step 1

Enter the capacity of rated Interrupter.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / A Wear Set

Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %

Default 100.00 Step 0.01%

It is to set Circuit breaker phase A contact wear value in ETR300-R. Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers to “MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET / CONTACT WEAR”.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / B Wear Set

Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %


It is to set Circuit breaker phase B contact wear value in ETR300-R. Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers to “MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET / CONTACT WEAR”.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CONTACT WEAR / C Wear Set

Range 0.00 ~ 100.00 %


It is to set Circuit breaker phase C contact wear value in ETR300-R. Set value is available after Contact Wear Rset. Contact wear reset refers to “MAINENANCE/ DATA RESET / CONTACT WEAR”.

6.4.4. Battery Test Place the curser on “BATTERY TEST” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / BATTERY TEST / Period

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 720 hour

Default 24 Step 1 hour

Set a time period for automatic battery test.

[BATTERY TEST] >Period: 24 [0(OFF),1~720:1hr]

[CONTACT WEAR] >B Wear Set: 100.00 >C Wear Set: 100.00 [0.00~100.00:0.01%]

[CONTACT WEAR] >A Wear Set: 100.00 >B Wear Set: 100.00 [0.00~100.00:0.01%]

[CONTACT WEAR] >A Wear Set: 100.00 >B Wear Set: 100.00 [0.00~100.00:0.01%]

[CONTACT WEAR] Interrupt(kA): 12.5 >No. Max I: 100 [1~999:1]



6.4.5. Power Quality Monitoring Place the curser on “PQM” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Power Quality Monitoring elements are set in this menu and sub-menu is as below.

PQM functions follows IEEE 1159 standard. IEEE 1159 standard determines under categorizing into several groups depending on electric fluctuation depending on size and continuous time. Voltage fluctuation and its categories are as shown in “Ficture 6-2 . IEEE 1159 Voltage distortion summary”.

Ficture 6-2. IEEE 1159 Voltage distortion summary All PQM function is calculated under 128 sampling.

[PQM] >1.PQM FUNCTION 2.INTERRUPT 3.SAG 4.SWELL 5.HARMONICS 6.CURR UNBALANCE 7.VOLT UNBALANCE 8.UNDER VOLTAGE 9.OVER VOLTAGE 10.UNDER FREQUENCY 11.ITHD/UBI I LIMIT



6.4.5.1. PQM Function

Place the curser on “PQM FUNCTION” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / PQM FUNCTION / Function



Select whether to use PQM function. If the function is disabled, all PQM monitor function is disabled.

6.4.5.2. Interrupt

Place the curser on “INTERRUPT” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Level

Range 0(OFF), 0.10 ~ 0.49 pu

Default 0.10 Step 0.01 pu

It is to set Interrupt detect level for Power Quality. Detect level is set by multiplying selected value in here to source side rated voltage.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / INTERRUPT / Time

Range 0.5 ~ 10.0 cycle

Default 2.0 Step 0.5 cycle

Set a interrupt detecting time.

6.4.5.3. Sag

Place the curser on “ SAG” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / SAG / Level

Range 0(OFF), 0.50 ~ 0.99 pu


Set a voltage sag(low voltage) for Power Quality. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.

[SAG] >Level: 0.90 >Time: 2.0 [0(OFF),0.50~0.99pu]

[INTERRUPT] >Level: 0.30 >Time: 2.0 [0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

[INTERRUPT] >Level: 0.30 >Time: 2.0 [0(OFF),0.10~0.49pu]

[PQM FUNCTION] >Function: DISABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]



GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SAG / Time



Set a detect time for voltage sag(voltage low).

6.4.5.4. Swell

Place the curser on “SWELL” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / SWELL / Level

Range 0(OFF), 1.01 ~ 1.50 pu


Set a detect level of Voltage swell(high voltage) for Power Quality. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / SWELL / Time



Set a time to detect voltage swell.

6.4.5.5. Harmonics

Place the curser on “HARMONIC” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %

Default OFF Step 0.1%

Set a detect level of voltage total harmonic distortion.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / VTHD Delay

Range 0.2 ~ 60.0 sec


Set a detect time to detect voltage total harmonic distortion.

[HARMONICS] >VTHD Pickup: OFF>VTHD Delay: 1.0[0.2~60.0:0.1s]

[HARMONICS] >VTHD Pickup: OFF>VTHD Delay: 1.0[0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]

[SWELL] >Level: 1.20>Time: 2.0[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]

[SWELL] >Level: 1.20>Time: 2.0[0(OFF),1.01~1.50pu]

[SAG] >Level: 0.90>Time: 2.0[0.5~10.0:0.5cycle]



GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 0.5 ~ 100.0 %

Default OFF Step 0.1%

Set a detect level of current total harmonic distortion.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / HARMONICS / ITHD Delay



Set a detect time to detect current total harmonic distortion.

6.4.5.6. Current Unbalance

Place the curser on “CURR UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / CURR UNBALANCE / Level

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 100 %

Default 30 Step 1 %

Set a detect level of Current Unbalance for Power Quality. Unbalance current is calculated by following formula.

1001

2 ×=IIUIrate

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / CURR UNBALANCE / Time



Set a detect time of current unbalance.

[CURR UNBALANCE] >Level: 30 >Time: 4.0 [0.1~60.0:0.1s]

[CURR UNBALANCE] >Level: 30 >Time: 4.0 [0(OFF),1~100:1%]

[HARMONICS] >ITHD Pickup: OFF >ITHD Delay: 1.0 [0.2~60.0:0.1s]

[HARMONICS] >ITHD Pickup: OFF >ITHD Delay: 0.5 [0(OFF),0.5~100.0%]



6.4.5.7. Voltage Unbalance

Place the curser on “VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / VOLT UNBALANCE / Level

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 100 %

Default 30 Step 1 %

Set a detect level of Voltage Unbalance for Power Quality. Unbalance voltage is calculated by following formula.

1001

2 ×=VVUVrate

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / VOLT UNBALANCE / Time



Set a detect time of voltage unbalance.

6.4.5.8. Under Voltage

Place the curser on “UNDER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE / Level

Range 0(OFF), 0.30 ~ 0.95 pu


Set an under voltage detect level for power quality. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / UNDER VOLTAGE / Time

Range 0.0 ~ 180.0 sec


Set an under voltage detecting time.

[UNDER VOLTAGE] >Level: 0.80>Time: 4.0[0.0~180.0:0.1s]

[UNDER VOLTAGE] >Level: 0.80>Time: 4.0[0(OFF),0.30~0.95pu]

[VOLT UNBALANCE] >Level: 30>Time: 4.0[0.1~60.0:0.1s]

[VOLT UNBALANCE] >Level: 30>Time: 4.0[0(OFF),1~100:1%]



6.4.5.9. Over Voltage

Place the curser on “OVER VOLTAGE” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE / Level

Range 0(OFF), 1.05 ~ 1.50 pu


Set an over voltage detect level for power quality. Detect level is set by multiplying a set value in here to source side rated voltage.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / OVER VOLTAGE / Time

Range 0.0 ~ 180.0 sec


Set an over voltage detecting time.

6.4.5.10. Under Frequency

Place the curser on “UNDER FRQUENCY” in PQM menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / UNDER FREQUENCY / Level

Range 0(OFF), 46.00 ~ 59.98 Hz

Default 59.50* Step 0.01 Hz

Set an under frequency detect level for power quality.


the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / UNDER FREQUENCY / Time

Range 0.03 ~ 10.00 sec


Set an under frequency detecting time.

[UNDER FREQUENCY] >Level: 59.80 >Time: 0.03 [0.03~10.00:0.01s]

[UNDER FREQUENCY] >Level: 59.80 >Time: 0.03 0(OFF),46.00~59.98Hz

[OVER VOLTAGE] >Level: 0.80 >Time: 4.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]

[OVER VOLTAGE] >Level: 1.20 >Time: 4.0 [0(OFF),1.05~1.50pu]



6.4.5.11. Current Unbalance/THD Detect Limit

Place the cursor on “ITHD/UBI I LIMIT” menu, press [ENT] key and move to this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / PQM / ITHD/UBI I LIMIT / Limit

Range 0 ~ 630 A

Default 60 Step 1A

Set the minimum current value to detect the current unbalance element and current harmonic distortion element. If load current is smaller this level, then current unbalance and current THD status point does not maked.

6.4.6. TD Monitor Place the curser on “TD MONITOR” in MONITORING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. It is to set Transducer to monitor DC Analog input. It has 5 channels of transducer, each transducer has 2 pickup setting values to detects the signal

size of input, monitoring in 2 levels the input sinal which is over than pickup setting value and give the alarm.

The no. 1 and 2 transducer can detect the battery and charger status by receiving the battery voltage and charge section voltage in input signal and sending to the controller.

TD3 is reserved for Gas type tank. User can use TD4 and TD5, these channels are current type of 20mA rated current. Input value in Transducer can be checked in metering menu.

Table 6-3. TD and Terminal Relations

TD Teminal(Input) H/W Spec. Purpose

TD1-1 Internal Battery Volt 40V

Battery bad detection

TD1-2 Power down mode

TD2-1 Internal Charger Volt 40V Charger bad detection

TD3-1 DC1(Side Pannel) 10V Reserved(GAS)

TD4 DC2(Side Pannel) 20mA User Avaliable

TD5 DC3(Side Pannel) 20mA User Avaliable

[ITHD/UBI I LIMIT] >Limit: 60 [0~630:1A]



GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Rate

Range 1 ~ 200

Default 40 Step 1

Set Transducer 1(TD1) monitoring range.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Ratio

Range 1 ~ 3000

Default 1 Step 1

Set Transducer 1(TD1) ratio.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1 Offset

Range -10000 ~ +10000

Default 0 Step 1

Set an Offset of Transducer 1(TD1).

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 Type

Range UNDER, OVER

Default UNDER Step ~

Set Transducer 1(TD1) Under or Over. Under setting provides pickup and alarm when it senses under the pickup value. Over setting provides pickup and alarm when it senses over the pickup value.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 PU

Range 0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0


Set TD1 pickup value.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-1 Delay

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Set a delay time of TD1.

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-1 PU: OFF >TD1-1 Delay: 2.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-1 PU: 21.0 >TD1-1 Delay: 2.00 0(OFF),0~6000.0:0.1

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-1 Type: UNDER >TD1-1 PU: 21.0 [UNDER/OVER]

[TD MONITOR] >TD1 Ratio: 1 >TD1 Offset: +0 [-10000 ~ +10000:1]

[TD MONITOR] >TD1 Rate: 1 >TD1 Ratio: 1 [1~3000:1]

[TD MONITOR] >TD1 Rate: 40 >TD1 Ratio: 1 [1~200:1]



GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 Type

Range UNDER, OVER

Default UNDER Step ~

Set 2nd monitoring element of TD1.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 PU

Range 0(OFF), 0 ~ 6000.0

Default 19.0* Step 0.1

Set 2nd pickup value of TD1.


the option type.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / TD MONITOR / TD1-2 Delay

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Set 2nd delay time of TD1.

※. NOTE : TD2 ~ TD5, the same as TD1 above.

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-2 PU: OFF>TD1-2 Delay: 2.00[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-2 PU: 19.0>TD1-2 Delay: 2.000(OFF),0~6000.0:0.1

[TD MONITOR] >TD1-2 Type: UNDER>TD1-2 PU: 19.0[UNDER/OVER]



6.4.7. Fault Locator The fault locator calculates the distance to the fault. When fault occurs the magnitude and the phase of voltage and current are varied, and then fault type(phase to ground, (phase to phase to ground), phase to phase, three phase) can be determined by the analysis of these variations, and fault distance can be calculated by the estimation of the apparent impedance. This calculation is based on the assumptions that the feeder positive and zero sequence impedance are a constant per unit distance and fault impedance is composed of pure resistance. In calculating, errors could be introduced by several reasons(fault resistance etc.), the major error due to fault resistance can be reduced by comparing the prefault current and voltage to the fault current and voltage. For more accurate calculation, the prefault data is required at least 2 cycles, and the after fault data is required at least 2 cycles. If the line impedance per unit and total length were known, the fault distance can be easily achieved, but source impedance is not required. Fault data may not be accurate for a close-into-fault condition where there is no prefault power flow. In case of closing, during a reclose sequence, the apparent distance of the first fault is very useful. The algorithm for the fault locator is most applicable to a radial three-phase feeder. Faulted distribution system is considered as following simplified “Figure 6-3. Faulted distribution system circuit” for example.

Ficture 6-3. Faulted distribution system circuit The calculated “Fault Location” can be checked on the “Fault Cycle” event menu. For more details, refer to “8.3. Fault Cycle - Summary”.

NOTE : “Fault Locator” function is supported from version 3.80 of ETR300-R.

mZ (1-m)Z

IAIF

VA RF

LOAD



The fault locator settings are as follows ;

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Function

Range OFF, ON

Default OFF Step ~


GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Feeder Length

Range 0.1 ~ 99.9 km

Default 50.0 Step 0.1 km

Enter the total length of the feeder in kilometers

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1-Resistive

Range 0.1 ~ 6000.0


Enter the total real components of the feeder positive sequence impedance, in actual ohms.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z1-Inductive

Range 0.1 ~ 6000.0


Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder positive sequence impedance, in actual ohms.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0-Resistive

Range 0.1 ~ 6000.0


Enter the total real components of the feeder zero sequence impedance, in actual ohms.

GLOBAL SETTING / MONITORING / FAULT LOCATOR / Z0-Inductive

Range 0.1 ~ 6000.0


Enter the total imaginary components of the feeder zero sequence impedance, in actual ohms.

[FAULT LOCATOR] >Z0(RES) : 10.0>Z0(IND) : 10.0[0.1~6000.0:0.1]

[FAULT LOCATOR] >Z1(IND) : 10.0>Z0(RES) : 10.0[0.1~6000.0:0.1]

[FAULT LOCATOR] >Z1(RES) : 10.0>Z1(IND) : 10.0[0.1~6000.0:0.1]

[FAULT LOCATOR] >Length(km) : 50.0>Z1(RES) : 10.0[0.1~6000.0:0.1]

[FAULT LOCATOR] Function : OFF>Length(km) : 50.0[0.1~99.9:0.1km]

[FAULT LOCATOR] >Function : OFF Length(km) : 50.0[OFF/ON]



6.5. Loop Control

The purpose of using LOOP CONTROL is to isolate a fault area and protect the normal operation area by coordinating with C/B or Recloser when a fault occurs. Loop control is able to provide automation system with using Sectionalizing Recloser, MID point Recloser, TIE point Recloser. Loop control is performed by voltage sensing of DV(Dead Line Voltage), LV(Live Line Voltage).

Sectionalizing Recloser(SEC) When a fault is occurred from the source side of Sectionalizing Recloser and backup C/B operates, the line becomes DV and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault. Hence, Sectionalizing Recloser is opened. After Sectionalizing Recloser is opened and TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. Therefore, the load side of Sectionalizing Recloser can keep the live line. When Load side of Sectionalizing Recloser has a fault, OCR Function is operated and the load side is disconnected.

MIDpoint Recloser(MID) When a fault is occurred in the source side of MIDpoint Recloser and backup C/B or Sectionalizing Recloser operates, the line becomes DV status and if it continues, it is figured as a permanent fault, then automatically the setting is changed to Alternate setting. After changed to Alternate setting, when TIEpoint Recloser is closed, the current flows in opposite way. During TIEpoint Recloser closed, when a fault occurs, MIDpoint Recloser trips once and lockouts. After recovering the fault, connect C/B and when the line becomes LV, the setting is automatically changed to Primary setting and MIDpoint Recloser is closed. When Load side of MIDpoint Recloser gets a fault, OCR Function is operated and disconnects the load side.

TIEpoint Recloser (TIE) TIEpoint Recloser automatically closes when either Source side or Load side becomes DV. When a fault occurs during automatic closing, the recloser trips once and lockouts. TIEpoint recloser automatically opens when loop control operates automatic closing at both side and when both side becomes DV.



LCD Initial Screen Recloser type that is selected in Loop control, is displayed on LCD Initial Screen.

Press [ENT] KEY to check operation status on the Initial Screen to see loop control mode.

LOOP CONTROL: [SEC] , [MID], [TIE] Display a selected type.

VS: [DV], [LV] Display Source side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or Live line voltage.

VL: [DV], [LV] Display Load side voltage of Recloser either Dead line voltage or Live line voltage.

VSDLT: [ - ], [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage of Recloser’s Source side.

VLDLT: [ - ], [RUN] Displays loop control function is operating due to the dead line voltage of Recloser’s Load side.

AUTO RESTORE T: [ - ], [RUN] Displays Restoring status after Loop control operation.

LOOP CONTROL KEY Use LOOP CONTROL KEY to use Loop control on User interface Panel.

Ficture 6-4. Loop Control Key

LOOP CONTROL ENABLED Enable/Disables Loop control function. Lamp is on when Loop control function is Enabled. SEC, MID can be selected on CLOSE status and TIE can be selected on OPEN status.

LOOP CONTROL AUTO RESTORE Enable/Disables Auto restoration function of SEC, MID. Lamp is on when Auto restoration function is enabled. Auto restoration function is, after loop control operation, Auto Rest’ T” timer operates till timeout, and restores the preset values.

LOOP CONTROL [TIE]VS-[DV] VSDLT-[ - ]VL-[DV] VLDLT-[ - ]AUTO RESTORE T [ - ]



6.5.1. Setting GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL /

LOOP CONTROL SUB SETUP MENU Place the curser on “LOOP CONTROL”, in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / Type Select

Range NONE, SEC, MID, TIE

Default NONE Step ~

Set whether to use Recloser type and loop control function. After setting this, press [LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button (lamp ON) to operate this function. NONE : Loop control is not in use. SEC : It is used for SECtionalizing recloser. MID : It is used for MIDpoint. TIE : It is used for TIEpoint.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to S/M

Range VS, VL

Default VS Step ~

Voltage Response Side to SEC&MID : The setting values are used in SEC, MID. Recloser operates upon selected side of voltage sensing. Select the Voltage response side when Recloser type is SEC & MID

VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage

[LOOP CONTROL] >VRS to S/M : VS >VRS to Tie : VS [VS/VL]

[LOOP CONTROL] >Type Select : NONE >VRS to S/M : VS [NONE/SEC/MID/TIE]

[LOOP CONTROL] >Type Select : NONE >VRS to S/M : VS >VRS to Tie : VS >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 3PN >CAS to Mid: OFF >CAS to Tie: OFF >LC After Cl:DISABLE >LC After Op:DISABLE >OT Both DB: 5.00 >AR Time: 5.00 >DLV Max(%): 20.0 >LLV Min(%): 70.0 >DLPT Delay: 60.00 >LLPT Delay: 10.00 >DLRT Delay: 5.00 >NRT After LA: 15.00



GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VRS to Tie

Range VS, VL, VS&VL

Default VS Step ~

Voltage Response Side to Tie : The setting value is used in TIE. TIE operates upon selected side of voltage sensing.

VS : Recloser’s Source Side(A,B,C phase) Voltage VL : Recloser’s Load Side(R,S,T phase) Voltage VS&VL : Loop control operates one of either Source side or load

side voltage becomes dead line voltage

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VS wire

Range 3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA)

Default 3PN Step ~

Line VS Wire : Select Recloser’s Source side(A,B,C phase) voltage sensor(CVD or VT) connection type. Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage. CVD type Control measures A, B, C phase voltage.

3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A

[LOOP CONTROL] >VS Wire: 3PN>VL Wire: 3PN[Combination of ABC]

[LOOP CONTROL] >VRS to S/M : VS>VRS to Tie : VS[VS/VL/VS&VL]



GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / VL wire

Range 3PN,3PP,1PN(A),1PN(B),1PN(C),1PP(AB),1PP(BC),1PP(CA)

Default 3PN Step ~

Line VL Wire : Select Recloser Load side(R,S,T phase) voltage sensor(CVD or VT) connection type. Selected phase is used to figure dead/live line voltage. Select 1PN(A) to measure R phase voltage for CVD type Control S,T phase are not measured.

3PN : 3 Phase-Neutral 3PP : 3 Phase-Phase 1PN(A) : Phase A-Neutral 1PN(B) : Phase B-Neutral 1PN(C) : Phase C-Neutral 1PP(AB) : Phase A-Phase B 1PP(BC) : Phase B-Phase C 1PP(CA) : Phase C-Phase A

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / CAS to Mid

Range OFF, ON

Default OFF Step ~

Change Alternate Setting at Mid Point : Select whether to use automatic setting change in MID type. DV status is remained for ‘LLPT Delay’ time, setting group changes from Primary setting group to Alternate setting group. To use this function, Loop control setting shall be the same in Primary and Alternate setting group.

OFF : Turn off auto change. ON : Turn on auto change.

[LOOP CONTROL] >CAS to Mid: OFF >CAS to Tie: OFF [OFF/ON]

[LOOP CONTROL] >VS Wire: 3PN >VL Wire: 3PN [Combination of ABC]



GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / CAS to Tie

Range OFF, VS, VL, BOTH

Default OFF Step ~

Change Alternate Setting at Tie Point : Set value is used in TIE. Select if Primary setting is automatically changed to Alternate setting, after set time(LL Regain T). To use this function, Loop control(setting value) of Primary and Alternate shall be set as the same.

OFF : Turn off auto change. ON(VS) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS. ON(VL) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VL. ON(BOTH) : Turn on Auto change by measuring VS or VL.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Cl



Select After Manual Close : Setting value is used in SEC. To select Loop Control automatically enable after recloser is closed by Manual operation. Manual close is referred when the operation signal is coming from remote or local. When Loop control function is enabled, PROGRAM 1 LED on User interface panel is turned on.

DISABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is not automatically activated.(Use PROGRAM 1 to activate it)

ENABLE : After Manual close, Loop control function is automatically activated.

[LOOP CONTROL] >LC After Cl:DISABLE>LC After Op:DISABLE[DISABLE/ENABLE]

[LOOP CONTROL] >CAS to Mid: OFF>CAS to Tie: OFF[OFF/VS/VL/BOTH]



GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LC After Op



Select After Manual Open : It is applicable to TIE type Recloser. It is to operate Loop control function automatically when recloser is manually opened by locally or remotely. When loop control function is available, the user interface panel LOOP CONTROL ENABLED LED is ON. DISABLE : After manual closing, loop control function does not

operate. ([LOOP CONTROL ENABLED] button shall be pressed.)

ENABLE : After manual closing, loop control function is automatically operated.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / OT Both DB

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Open Time on Both Dead Bus : Setting value is used in TIE. After TIE closed, source and load sides become dead line for a certain period, TIE opens by Loop control.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / AR Time

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Auto Restoration Time : Setting value is used in SEC, MID. This is active when Program 2 on User Interface Panel is enable. SEC operates Loop control(Automatic Open) if a voltage selected from “VRS – S/M” becomes dead line. After opened, the voltage becomes Live Line, a certain period later, restores (Automatic Close). MID, if a voltage selected form “VRS – S/M” becomes dead line, and when Loop control(“Chg Alt-Tie” is on, it automatically changes to Alternate Setting. Due to loop control operation, even if TIE recloser is closed and back to live line, MID will trip and lockout if the fault is not cleared. After clearing the fault and live line comes back, it is returned.(Automatically closed and changes to Primary setting)

[LOOP CONTROL] >OT Both DB: 5.00 >AR Time: 5.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

[LOOP CONTROL] >LC After Cl:DISABLE >LC After Op:DISABLE [DISABLE/ENABLE]

[LOOP CONTROL] >OT Both DB: 5.00 >AR Time: 5.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]



GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / DLV Max(%)

Range 20.0 ~ 70.0 %


Dead Bus Maximum Voltage(%) : Sense Dead Line Voltage. In Live Line, when a voltage is decreased below a set value, it determines Dead Line. In Source side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VS Wire”. In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LLV Min(%)

Range 50.0 ~ 85.0 %


Live Bus Minimum Voltage(%) : Sense Live Line Voltage. In Dead Line, when a voltage is increased over a set value, it determines Live Line. In Source side, it is figured form a selected phase from “VS Wire”, In Load side, it is figured from a selected phase from “VL Wire”.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / DLPT Delay

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Dead Bus Pickup Time Delay : During “DL Pickup T”, the line becomes Dead Line and “LL Regain T” Timer shall be operated so that SEC, MID, TIE can operate. “DL Pickup T” Timer is the Cumulative Timer to count Dead Line time while C/B or Recloser is doing re-close operation. Timer is not reset regardless of Live Line and it is reset by “DL rest T” Timer. Setting shall be the same or bigger than the sum of C/B or recloser’s reclosing time.

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLPT Delay: 60.0>LLPT Delay: 10.00[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLV Max(%): 50.0>LLV Min(%): 70.0[50.0~85.0:0.1%]

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLV Max(%): 50.0>LLV Min(%): 70.0[20.0~70.0:0.1%]



GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / LLPT Delay

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Live Bus Pickup Time Delay : “DL Pickup T” shall be finished and during reset time, the line shall not be Live Line. SEC time setting (LLPT Delay) shall be more than 5 sec longer than MID time setting for operation coordination. After set time, SEC is opened, MID changes setting from Primary to Alternate (‘CAS to Mid’ shall be ON). TIE changes setting group from Primary to Alternate and automatically closed(CLOSE operation)

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / DBRT Delay

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Dead Bus Reset Time Delay : It is a delay timer to reset accumulated time from “DL Pickup T”. This timer operates when “DL Pickup T” is set and the line becomes Live line.

GLOBAL SETTING / LOOP CONTROL / NRT After LA

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Non Reclose Time After LC Action : Setting values are used in MID, TIE. This timer prevents from Reclosing when recloser operates due to a fault after Loop control. After “LL Regain T” and changed Settings, while backward distributing line operating, if a fault occurs and MID trips within a set time, MID reclose. MID trips once and lockouts. If a fault occurs and MID trips after a set time, reclosing is executed. After “LL Regain T”, when a fault occurs and TIE trips within a set time, TIE also, trips once and lockout. If a fault occurs and TIE trips after a set time, reclosing is executed.

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLRT Delay: 5.00 >NRT After LA: 15.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLRT Delay: 5.00 >NRT After LA: 15.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

[LOOP CONTROL] >DLPT Delay: 50.0 >LLPT Delay: 10.00 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]



6.5.2. Loop Control Logic Diagram

Ficture 6-5. Sectionalizing Recloser Logic



Ficture 6-6. MID Point Recloser Logic



Ficture 6-7. TIE Point Recloser Logic



6.5.3. Loop Control Application 6.5.3.1. 5-Reclosers Loop Control

For five reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 2 sets of MID(MIDpoint Reclosers) and 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC-MID-TIE. In “Table 6-4. 5-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2, RC3 are installed for CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC4, RC5 are installed for CB2 side.

Table 6-4. 5-Reclosers Setting

SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 CB2

Type Select - SEC MID TIE MID SEC -

VRS – S/M - ⎯⎯←VS ⎯⎯←VS X ⎯→⎯VS ⎯→⎯VS -

VRS – Tie - X X VS&VL X X -

VS Wire - 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN 3PN -

VL Wire - 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) -

Cng Alt-Mid - X ON X ON X -

Cng Alt-Tie - X X ON X X -

LC After Cl - ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE -

LC After Op - - X ENABLE X - -

OT Both DL - X X 10.00 X X -

Auto Rest’ T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 -

DL V Max(%) - 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 -

LL V Min(%) - 70.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 -

DL Pickup T - 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 -

LL Regain T - 5.00 10.00 15.00 10.00 5.00 -

DL Reset T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 -

NRT After LC - X 10.00 10.00 10.00 X -

PROGRAM 1 - ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE -

PROGRAM 2 - ENABLE ENABLE X ENABLE ENABLE -

Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)

“X” is not used.



5-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault

Ficture 6-8. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F1 Fault Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip

Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. SEC, MID, TIE has the same setting time.

Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, SEC(RC1), MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate.

To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→MID→TIE in turn, MID shall have longer time set than SEC, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “LL Regain T” is enable, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting.

Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically, and then automatically close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line.

Step4 : After removing a Fault, close CB1, then, SEC(RC1) automatically close after Auto-Restoration Time.

Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3), change MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) setting to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.




Ficture 6-9. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operate reclosing sequence and tirp

lockout. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. When the line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. MID, TIE point recloser has the same setting time.

Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,

MID(RC2), TIE(RC3) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from MID→TIE in turn, TIE shall have longer time set than MID. When “LL Regain T” is enable, MID(RC2) changes to Alternate setting automatically.

Step3 : When “LL Regain T” is finished, TIE(RC3) automatically close after changing to Alternate setting.

Step4 : When closing TIE(RC3), MID(RC2) trip once and lockout because of F2 fault. F2 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line.

Step5 : After removing a Fault, close SEC(RC1), then, MID(RC3) automatically changes to Alternate setting after Auto Restoration Time.

Step6 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3) to recover the line as previous normal line.




Ficture 6-10. 5-Reclosers Loop Control at F2 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F3, MID(RC2) operate reclosing sequence and tirp

lockout. During MID(RC2) operation, accumulate Dead line time, and the accumulated Dead line time becomes “DL Pick T”. When the line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment.

Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC3) operate. When “LL Regain T” is enable, TIE(RC3) changes to Alternate setting automatically.

Step3 : When closing TIE(RC3), TIE(RC3) trip once and lockout because of F3 fault. F3 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line.

Step4 : After removing the fault, close MID(RC3) Step5 : Manually open TIE(RC3) and change to Primary setting.

Enable Loop control of TIE(RC3), and recover the previous the line as the previous normal line.



6.5.3.2. 3-Reclosers Loop Control For three - reclosers loop control, it consists of 2 sets of SEC(Sectionalizing Recloser), 1 set of TIE(TIEpoint Recloser). Setting is in-turn form Source side to SEC and to TIE. In “Table 6-5. 3-Reclosers Setting”, the source side bushings of RC1, RC2 are installed for CB1 side. And the source side bushings of RC3 is installed for CB2 side.

Table 6-5. 3-Reclosers Setting

SETTING CB1 RC1 RC2 RC3 CB2

Type Select - SEC TIE SEC -

VRS – S/M - ⎯⎯←VS X ⎯→⎯VS -

VRS – Tie - X VS&VL X -

VS Wire - 3PN 3PN 3PN -

VL Wire - 1PN(A) 1PN(A) 1PN(A) -

Cng Alt-Mid - X X X -

Cng Alt-Tie - X ON X -

LC After Cl - ENABLE X ENABLE -

LC After Op - - ENABLE - -

OT Both DL - X 10.00 X -

Auto Rest’ T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 -

DL V Max(%) - 50.0 50.0 50.0 -

LL V Min(%) - 70.0 70.0 70.0 -

DL Pickup T - 22.0 22.0 22.0 -

LL Regain T - 5.00 10.00 5.00 -

DL Reset T - 5.00 5.00 5.00 -

NRT After LC - X 10.00 X -

PROGRAM 1 - ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE -

PROGRAM 2 - ENABLE X ENABLE -

Reclose Time 2sec-1st reclose, 5sec-2nd reclose, 15sec-3rd reclose (lockout)

“X” is not used.




Ficture 6-11. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F1 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F1, CB1 operates reclosing sequence and then Trip

Lockouts. During CB1 operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates. “DL Pick T” is set by summing all reclosing time of back line equipment. SEC, TIE has the same setting time.

Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time,

SEC(RC1), TIE(RC2) operate. To operate “LL Regain T” from SEC→TIE in turn, TIE shall have longer time set than SEC. When “LL Regain T” is finished, SEC(RC1) is opened automatically, TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close. F1 is isolated by Loop control operation, the rest of region shall be alive by backward distributing line.

Step3 : After removing the fault, close CB1, SEC(RC1) is automatically closed after Auto Restoration Time.

Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to Primary setting. Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.




Ficture 6-12. 3-Reclosers Loop control at F2 Fault

Step1 : When Permanent Fault occurs at F2, SEC(RC1) operates reclosing sequence and then Trip

Lockouts. During SEC(RC1) operation, accumulates Dead line time and the accumulated time becomes “DL Pick T”. When a line is Dead Line, “LL Regain T” operates.

Step2 : “LL Regain T” is set, and if the line is not becoming Live line within a set time, TIE(RC2) automatically changes to Alternate setting and close. When closing TIE(RC2), TIE(RC2) trip once and lockouts because of F2.

Step3 : After removing the fault, close SEC(RC1). Step4 : Manually open TIE(RC2) and change to Primary setting.

Enable Loop control of TIE(RC2) and recover the line as the previous normal line.



6.6. Passcode

Place the curser on “PASSCODE” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Passcord can be changed in this menu. There are Passcord 1 and Passcord2. Passcord 1 is used for setting change of “Global Setting”, “Group Setting” and Passcord 2 is used for setting change of “Communication”. The passcord change procedure of both passcord is same. The procedure is same as below.

MAIN MANU\ PASSCORD\ PASSCORD1 or 2

①

②

③

④

⑤

⑥

In the screen ①, press the present password..

1) Use [], [] key to change the number and [ENT] or [] key to move to the next space .

2) Press [ENT] key after setting the 4 passcord.

In screen ②, enter the new passcord with the same above method.

To save the new passcord, press [ENT] key in screen ③.

When the changed password is saved, the screen ④ is displayed.

If the password entered in screen ① doesn’t coincide, screen ⑤ is displayed and move to screen ①.

If press [FUN] or [ESC] key in screen ③ after passcord change, screen ⑥ is displayed and the changed passcord is not saved.

[PASSCODE1] NEW PASSWORD

0000 PASSCODE NO CHANGE!

ENTER PASSCORD1

INVALID

[PASSCODE1] NEW PASSWORD

0000 PASSCODE SAVED:0000

[PASSCODE1] NEW PASSCORD

0000 PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE

[PASSCODE1] NEW PASSCORD

0000

ENTER PASSCORD

0000



6.7. PLC

Place the curser on “PLC” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

6.7.1. COMMON Place the curser on “1. COMMON” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

6.7.1.1. Logic Timer

Place the curser on “LOGIC TIMER” in COMMON menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. PLC has 16 logic timer. If Input A is occurred in logic timer, X time later, output B becomes 1. If input A is

disappeared, Y time later, output B becomes 0. Please refer to ‘Fgure 6-12. Logic Timer symbol’.

X is Pick-up timer, Y is Dropout timer.

In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic ITM. In PLC, B is output for TM.

Figure 6-13. Logic Timer Symbol

A

0s/0s

TM

BY

X

[OMMON] >1.LOGIC TIMER 2.PULSE TIMER 3.PULSE COUNTER

[PLC] >1.COMMON 2.DI/DO



GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-PU

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Set a pickup time of Logic timer 1.

GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / LOGIC TIMER / TM1-DO

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Set a Dropout Time of Logic timer 1.

※. NOTE : TM2 ~ TM16, the same as above.

6.7.1.2. Pulse Timer

Place the curser on “PULSE TIMER” in COMMON menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. PLC has 16 pulse timer. When Input A becomes 1 in pulse timer, output B becomes 1, this output comes for Y time.

Please refer to “Figure 6-13. Pulse Timer Symbol”

In PLC, A shall be input at the user logic IPTM. In PLC, B is output for PTM.

Figure 6-14. Pulse Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / PULSE TIMER / PTM1

Range 0.01 ~ 600.00 sec


Set a output time of pulse timer 1.

※. NOTE : PTM2 ~ PTM16, the same as above.

BAY

0s

PTM

[PULSE TIMER] >PTM1 : 0.01 PTM2 : 0.01

[0.01~600.00:0.01s]

[LOGIC TIMER] >TM1-PU: 0.05 >TM1-DO: 0.05 [0.01~600.00:0.01s]

[LOGIC TIMER] >TM1-PU: 0.05 TM1-DO: 0.05

[0.01~600.00:0.01s]



6.7.1.3. Pulse Counter

Place the curser on “PULSE COUNTER” in COMMON menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. PLC has 16 pulse counter. Whenever Input B becomes 0 and Input A becomes 1, the pulse counter increases and, it

reaches to set number X, output C becomes 1. If Input B becomes 1, Output C becomes 0 and increased count becomes 0. Please refer to ‘Fgure 6-14. Pulse Counter Symbol’.

In PLC, A shall be input at user logic CLSET. In PLC, B shall be input at user logic CLRST. In PLC, C is output for CLT

Figure 6-15. Pulse Counter Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / COMMON / PULSE COUNTER / PC1

Range 1 ~ 60000

Default 1 Step 1

Set output count value of Pulse counter 1(PC1).

※. NOTE : PC2 ~ PC16, the same as above.

A

B

0

PC

QR

XC

[PULSE TIMER] >PC1 : 1 PC2 : 1

[1~60000:1]

CLT



6.7.2. DI/DO Place the curser on “DI/DO” in PLC menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

6.7.2.1. Input Debounce Timer

Place the curser on “INPUT DEBOUNCE” in DI/DO menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

Input debounce timer is individually prepared in Control Input. Input debounce timer sets a time to remove Chattering of INPUT signal. In Input debounce timer, if Input A becomes 1, X time later, Output B becomes 1. If Input A is

disappeared, X time later, Output B becomes 0. Please refer to ‘Figure 6-15. Input Debounce Timer Symbol’.

In PLC, A is IN101~IN of Control Input, B is output for IN.

Figure 6-16. Input Debounce Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / DI/DO / INPUT DEBOUNCE / IN101

Range 0.005 ~ 10.000 sec


Set an Input Debounce Time of IN101.

※. NOTE ) ① IN102 ~ IN108 and IN201 ~ IN208, the same as above. ② Applicable for Ver 4.00 or higher of ETR300-R, IN301 ~ IN312 setting items are

indicated and the setting range is the same as above.

③ In fact, even though I/O unit ETIO10 is installed, if “EX-IO?” setting is set with "NO" in “GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION” menu, external I/O unit ETIO10 is not able to be used.

A

0s

X

X

IN

B

[INPUT DEBOUNCE] >IN101 : 0.020 IN102 : 0.020

0.005~10.000:0.001s

[DI/DO] >1.INPUT DEBOUNCE 2.OUTPUT PULSE TIME



6.7.2.2. Output Pulse Timer

Place the curser on “OUTPUT PULSE TIME” in DI/DO menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Output Pulse Timer has Control Output individually. In output pulse timer, Input B is 0 and, depending on Input A, Output C becomes 1. When

Input A becomes 1, Output C becomes 1 for Y time. However, if Y time is set for 0, depending on Input A, corresponding coincidently and if A is 1, C becomes 1, and if A becomes 0 then, C becomes 0 as buffer. Please refer to ‘Figure 6-16. Output Pulse Timer Symbol’.

In PLC, A shall be input at user logic IOUT. In PLC, B shall be input at user logic BOUT. In PLC, C is output for OUT and this output operates RELAY.

Figure 6-17. Output Pulse Timer Symbol

GLOBAL SETTING / PLC / DI/DO / OUTPUT PULSE TIME / OUT101

Range 0(BUFF), 0.01 ~ 100.00 sec

Default BUFF Step 0.01 sec

Set an Output pulse time of OUT101.

※. NOTE ) ① OUT102 ~ OUT108 and OUT201 ~ OUT208, the same as above. ② Applicable for Ver 4.00 or higher of ETR300-R, OUT301 ~ OUT308 setting items

are indicated and the setting range is the same as above.

③ In fact, even though I/O unit ETIO10 is installed, if “EX-IO?” setting is set with "NO" in “GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION” menu, external I/O unit ETIO10 is not able to be used.

A

B

0s

RY C

OUT

[OUTPUT PULSE TIME] >OUT101 : 0.01 OUT102 : 0.01

0(BUFF),0.01~100.00s



6.7.3. PLC Setting Example The user can use the inner timer and counter used for PLC setting and the EVENTs that occur

within to logically map out for easier control of input/output. For operators used in logical mapping, refer to “Table 6-6. Operator Symbols”.

Table 6-6. Operator Symbols

OPERATOR DESCRIPTION

*

“AND” - when all the inputs are 1, the output is 1.

+

“OR” – when one of the inputs is 1, the output is 1..

!

“NOT” – when the input is 1, the output is 0.

( ) - This operation is performed first.

1 - When outputting directly, the output is 1.

0 - When outputting directly, the output is 0.

-

Buffer output.

PLC logic setting example is as follows; If user wants pulse signal output at OUT101 port during Time Over Current(Fast/Delay) fault occurrence, set the PLC logic as the formula below.

Example: Logical Expression:

1) ITM01 = Y51P1T+Y51P2T+Y51G1T+Y51G2T+Y51N1T+Y51N2T+Y51Q1T+Y51Q2T

When any one of the following : Phase, Ground, S.E.F or NEQ Time Over Current(Fast/Delay) fault occurs, Logic Timer 01(TM01) is outputted. The Pickup Time and Dropout Time of Logic Timer 01 is set in “GLOBAL SETTING/ PLC/ COMMON/ LOGIC TIMER” menu.

※. NOTE ) Time Over Current Element related Logic Bit designation ① Y51P1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – Phase



② Y51P2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Phase

③ Y51G1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – Ground

④ Y51G2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - Ground

⑤ Y51N1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – S.E.F

⑥ Y51N2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out – S.E.F

⑦ Y51Q1T : Time Over Current1(Fast) Time-out – NEQ

⑧ Y51Q2T : Time Over Current1(Delay) Time-out - NEQ

2) IOUT101 = TM01

Map the output of Logic Timer 01 into the input of Output101 Pulse Timer. When the Pulse Timer input signal is 1, pulse signal is outputted. Output pulse time is set in “GLOBAL SETTING/ PLC/ DI/DO / OUTPUT PULSE TIME” menu.

3) BOUT101 = 0

As there is no block condition for Output101 port, 0 is always inputted.

The logic diagram for the logical expression example above is as “Figure 6-17. OUT101 Output Signal Logic Diagram”.

Figure 6-18. OUT101 Output Signal Logic Diagram

PLC Editting Example

As shown in “Figure 6-18. PLC Edit Screen”, input the logical expression in the PLC edit screen operating program then upload PLC data to ETR300-R. For more info, consult “ETR300 Interface Software User Manual”.

NOTE : when editing PLC logic, there must not be any blank space.



Figure 6-19. PLC Edit Screen

6.8. Others

Place the curser on “OTHERS” in GLOBAL SETTING menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

6.8.1. Time Display Type Place the curser on “TIME DISP’ TYPE” in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. It is to set Date Display for all related Menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / TIME DISP’ TYPE

Range YMD, MDY

Default MDY Step ~

YMD : it displays in turn Year / Month / Date MDY : it displays in turn Month / Date / Year

[TIME DISP’TYPE] >Time Disp’Type: MDY [YMD/MDY]

[OTHERS] >1.TIME DISP’ TYPE 2.PANEL SLEEP TIME 3.Vo SELECT 4.FACTORY DEBUG 5.AUTO SGRP CHANGE 6.H/W OPTION



6.8.2. Panel Sleep Time Place the curser on “PANEL SLEEP TIME” in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. Menu to set the interval time that User interface panel turns into sleep mode.

GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / PANEL SLEEP TIME

Range OFF, 1 ~ 100 min

Default OFF Step 1 min

Set a time for sleep mode delay. Within this set time, if there is no key operation on interface panel, ETR300-R goes into sleep mode.

6.8.3. Vo Select Place the curser on “Vo SELECT” in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / Vo SELECT

Range H/W, SEQ

Default SEQ* Step ~

Select the zero sequence voltage used in ground over current Protection element and SEF overcurrent protection element.

H/W : Use the zero sequence voltage as input voltage of side panel Vo voltage input pin.

SEQ : Use the zero sequence voltage calculated by Va, Vb and Vc voltage value.


the option type.

6.8.4. Factory Debug This menu is for Manufacturer’s maintenance purpose.

[V0 SELECT] >Select: SEQ [H/W/SEQ]

[PANEL SLEEP TIME] >Sleep Time: OFF [0(OFF),1~100:1m]



6.8.5. Auto Setting Group Change Sometimes, Recloser can be installed reversely against Power Flow(supply). In this case, it is necessary to change Protection setting. ETR300-R has two option to help in this situation. ETR300-R has two options Primary Setting and Alternate Setting. And these settings can be selected automatically by “AUTO SGRP CHANGE” function. Place the curser on “AUTO SGRP CHANGE” in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / AUTO SGRP CHANGE / Function

Range DISABLE/ENABLE


Set whether to use Setting Group Change. When this function is used, Primary setting is applied if power flow is forward and Alternate setting is applied if power flow is reverse (backward).

GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / AUTO SGRP CHANGE / Interval

Range 10 ~ 180 sec


If power flow is changed for this set time, setting group is changed.

Applying rules

This function is operated when Power line system is in normal condition. During fault detecting(pickup status) or in fault condition, it does not work.

This function shall be operated when 3 phase voltages are more than 50% of rated voltage and at least 1 phase has more than 10% of rated current.

NOTE : The location of “AUTO SGRP CHANGE” menu depends on ETR300-R version.

- Applicable for Ver 3.7 or higer of ETR300-R : Within “GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS” menu.

- Applicable for lower than Ver 3.7 or ETR300-R : Within “GROUP SETTING” menu.

[AUTO SGRP CHANGE] >Function: DISABLE>Interval: 30[10~180:1]

[AUTO SGRP CHANGE] >Function: DISABLEInterval: 30 [DISABLE/ENABLE]



6.8.6. H/W Option Place the curser on “H/W OPTION” in OTHERS menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. The H/W option of ETR300-R is set in this menu.

GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION / EX-IO?

Range NO, YES

Default NO Step ~

Select whether the external I/O unit ETIO10 is installed. In fact, even though I/O unit ETIO10 is installed, if this setting is set with "NO", external I/O unit ETIO10 is not able to be used.

GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION / GPS/IRIG?

Range NO, YES

Default NO Step ~

Select whether the time synchronization module(GPS or IRIG) is installed. In fact, even though time synchronization module is installed, if this setting is set with "NO", the time synchronization module is not able to be used.

NOTE : The menu is supported from version 3.80 of ETR300-R.

[H/W OPTION] >EX-IO?: NO >GPS/IRIG?: NO [NO/YES]

[H/W OPTION] >EX-IO?: NO GPS/IRIG?: NO [NO/YES]



7. GROUP SETTING Place the curser on “GROUP SETTING” in MAIN menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu.

GROUP SETTING menu has PRIMARY group, ALTERNATE group and EDITEBANK group. Group is selected by ON/OFF ‘ALTERNATE SETTINGS LED’ on ETR300-R panel. If ‘ATERNATE SETTING LED’ is OFF, PRIMARY group settings are applied, ‘ALTERNATE SETTINGS LED’ is ON, ALTERNATE group settings are applied.

Figure 7-1. Alternate Settings

[GLOBAL SETTING] >1.PRIMARY 2.ALTERNATE 3.EDITBANK 4.SELECT SETBANK 5.AUTO SGRP CHANGE



7.1. Protection(Primary, Alternate and Editebank Setup)

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE and EDITBANK group’s sub-menu are all the same as below. Sub-menu are to set Protection elements.

NOTE : Changed set value must be saved to be applied. When escaping from “*.SAVE SETTING” menu or moving to high menu, changed set value is saved by ‘Changed set value saved message’.

[PRIMARY SETTING] >1.OPERATION 2.INTERVALS 3.PICKUP CURRENT 4.PHASE FAST 5.PHASE DELAY 6.GROUND FAST 7.GROUND DELAY 8.SEF ELEMENT 9.NEG SEQ FUNC 10.NEG FAST 11.NEG DELAY 12.H/C TRIP-PHA 13.H/C TRIP-GND 14.H/C TRIP-NEG 15.H/C LOCKOUT-PHA 16.H/C LOCKOUT-GND 17.H/C LOCKOUT-NEG 18.COLD LOAD PICKUP19.DIRECTION 20.VOLTAGE 21.FREQUENCY 22.USER CURVE 23.LIVE LOAD BLOCK 24.HOTLINE TAG 25.LIVE LINE 26.DEAMAND 27.OTHER ELEMENT 28.ON/OFF LEVEL 29.ALARM CURRENT 30.LOSS OF PHASE *.SAVE SETTING



Protective Elements Block diagram - ANSI Designations

Figure 7-2. Protective Elements Block Diagram - ANSI Designations

VT

CVDTRANSDUCER

CVDTRANSDUCER

VT

OPTION 1

OPTION 1

3CVD

1CVD

3VT

1VT

50P1,2

51P1,2

MeteringV, I, Watt, var, Hz, PF

25

27

271,2

591,2

3I0

I2

CT3WYE

46/501,2

50G1,2

51G1,2

46/511,2

I1

67P1,2

67G1,2

V1, V2, 3V0

51SEF

81

SOURCE

LOAD

REC

LOSE

R

81

ZCT3I0

67SEF

E V R C 2 A

46/671,2

CVD

VTOPTION 2

OPTION 2

791-4

ETR300



Protective Elements - ANSI Designations

Table 7-1. Protective Elements -ANSI Designations

Protective Elements ANSI

DesignationsLCD Menu

Four shot recloser 79 GROUP SETTING/ …/ OPERATION and INTERVALS

Phase fast time overcurrent 51P1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ PHASE FAST

Phase delay time overcurrent 51P2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ PHASE DELAY

Ground fast time overcurrent 51G1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ GROUND FAST

Ground delay time overcurrent 51G2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ GROUND DELAY

Sensitive Earth Fault protection 51SEF GROUP SETTING/ …/ SEF ELEMENT

Negative sequence fast time overcurrent 46(51)-1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ NEG SEQ FAST

Negative sequence delay time overcurrent 46(51)-2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ NEG SEQ DELAY

Phase instantaneous high current trip 50P1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C TRIP-PHA

Ground instantaneous high current trip 50G1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C TRIP-GND

Negative sequence instantaneous high current trip 46(50)1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C TRIP-NEG

Phase High current trip lockout 50P2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA

Ground High current trip lockout 50G2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C LOCKOUT-GND

Negative sequence High current trip lockout 46(50)2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG

Cold load pickup - GROUP SETTING/ …/ COLD LOAD PICKUP

Phase directional time control 67P GROUP SETTING/ …/ DIRECTION / PHASE

Ground directional time control 67G GROUP SETTING/ …/ DIRECTION / GROUND

Directional Sensitive Earth Fault 67SEF GROUP SETTING/ …/ DIRECTION / SEF

Negative sequence directional time control 67I2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ DIRECTION / NEG SEQ

Under voltage 1 27-1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 1

Under voltage 2 27-2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 2

Over voltage 1 59-1 GROUP SETTING/ …/ VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 1

Over voltage 2 59-2 GROUP SETTING/ …/ VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLTAGE 2

Under frequency 81U GROUP SETTING/ …/ FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQUENCY

Over frequency 81O GROUP SETTING/ …/ FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQUENCY

Synchronism check 25 GLOBAL SETTING/ MONITORING/ SYNCHROCHECK

Sequence coordination - GROUP SETTING/ …/ OTHER ELEMENT / Seq’ Coordi’

Loss of Phase - GROUP SETING/ …/ LOSS OF PHASE



7.1.1. Reclose (79) After a fault has occurred, the Reclose element closes the recloser when the programmed reclose interval time expires. The number of operation lockout setting is programmed one to five, and each reclose shot has its own separate reclose interval timer. If the fault is permanent and the recloser continues to trip and reclose, the Reclose element will continue to increment the operating counter. If this continues to the maximum number of the operating lockout programmed in the Reclose element, the reclose logic lockouts. At this moment, if make close operation remotely or locally, Lockout is released and fault detecting is activated. Also, if the fault is temporary, the Lockout sequence of the Recloser is Rest by Reset logic. If the fault is transient, then the reclose logic is reset by the reset logic. The reclosing element can be disabled in the Primary, Alternate settings by one operating lockout or by [RECLOSE ENABLED] push button on user interface panel. The Reclose Element should be enabled to the following settings. Operation Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-PHA

Range 1 ~ 5

Default 4 Step 1

Select the total number of the phase trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the phase trip operations.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-GND

Range 1 ~ 5

Default 4 Step 1

Select the total number of the ground trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the ground trip operations.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-SEF

Range 1 ~ 5

Default 4 Step 1

Select the total number of the SEF trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the SEF trip operations

[OPERATION] Lockout-GND: 4>Lockout-SEF: 4[1~5:1]

[OPERATION] Lockout-PHA: 4>Lockout-GND: 4[1~5:1]

[OPERATION] >Lockout-PHA: 4 Lockout-GND: 4[1~5:1]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Lockout-NEQ

Range 1 ~ 5

Default 4 Step 1

Select the total number of the negative sequence trip operations. This setting is used to change the total number of the negative sequence trip operations.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-PHA

Range 0 ~ 5

Default 2 Step 1

Select the number of the phase fast curve operations. This setting is used to change the number of the phase fast curve operations.

The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-PHA and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-PHA is the number of remaining phase delay curve operations.

※. NOTE : Total number of Recloser operation = fast curve Operation No. + delay curve Operation No.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-GND

Range 0 ~ 5

Default 2 Step 1

Select a number for the ground fast curve operations. This setting is used to change the number of the ground fast curve operations.

The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-GND and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-GND is the number of remaining ground delay curve operations.


[OPERATION] Fast Curve-PHA: 2 >Fast Curve-GND: 2 [0~5:1]

[OPERATION] Lockout-SEF: 4 >Fast Curve-PHA: 2 [0~5:1]

[OPERATION] Lockout-SEF: 4 >Lockout-NEQ: 4 [1~5:1]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OPERATIONS / Fast Curve-NEQ

Range 0 ~ 5

Default 2 Step 1

Select a number for the negative sequence fast curve operations. This setting is used to change the number of the negative sequence fast curve operations.

The difference between setting [OPERATION] Lockout-NEQ and setting [OPERATION] Fast Curve-NEQ is the number of remaining negative sequence delay curve operations.


Intervals Setup

Set the reclosing time of phase fault (negative phase sequence included), ground fault and SEF fault. The reclosing time is applied individually according to the fault type.

1) Intervals Setup – PHASE/NEQ SEQ’ PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / … / Reclose 1

Range Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : 0.5 ~ 600.0 sec Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : 0.1 ~ 600.0 sec


This setting is used to change the first reclose interval time between the first trip operation and the close operation.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / … / Reclose 2

Range 1 ~ 1800 sec




Range 1 ~ 1800 sec



[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] Reclose 2: 2>Reclose 3: 2[1~1800:1s]

[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] Reclose 1: 0.60>Reclose 2: 2[1~1800:1s]

[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] >Reclose 1: 0.6 Reclose 2: 2.00[0.5~60.0:0.1s]

[OPERATION] Fast Curve-GND: 2>Fast Curve-NEQ: 2[0~5:1]




Range 1 ~ 1800 sec



2) Intervals Setup – GROUND The ground interval settings process is the same as the phase interval.

3) Intervals Setup – SEF The SEF interval settings process is the same as the phase interval.

4) Intervals Setup – OTHER PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / OTHERS/ Reset T(AR)

Range 3 ~ 180 sec


It is to select Reset time during auto reclosing. During reclosing sequence operation, if current is back to normal for this set time, recloser sequence is Reset. Generally, Reclosing reset time shall be set longer than present reclose sequence time. During reclose sequence time, if a fault current is removed, ‘Reset T(AR)’ time starts and during ‘Reset T(AR)’ time, a fault is detected again, Reset timer is reset.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / OTHERS/ Reset T(LO)

Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec


To set Lockout reset time. After recloser is closed by locally or remotely, within this set time, auto reclosing is not activated. It is to eliminate reclosing sequence if a fault current is detected after manual closing, and to have waiting time for feeder stabilization. After this set time, Recloser function is activated.

[OTHERS] Reset T(AR): 30 >Reset T(LO): 10.00 [1.00~600.00:0.01s]

[OTHERS] >Reset T(AR): 30 Reset T(LO): 10.00 [3~180:1s]

[PHASE/NEG SEQ’] Reclose 3: 2 >Reclose 4: 15 [1~1800:1s]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / INTERVALS / OTHERS/ C/P Wait

Range 1.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Close Power Wait. : Waiting time to get power supply. During reclose sequence, power supply is not enough to operate mechanism, it counts for this set time and if the power supply is not provided, then reclose sequence is stopped and lockout.

7.1.1.1. Lockout

The lockout state occurs under any of the following conditions : When RECLOSE ENABLED LED is OFF and a fault current is occurred. When the high current lockout has occurred. After manual closing, a fault current is occurred within Reset T(LO). When recloser is manually opened. After TRIP occurs, the fault current is not removed or the recloser’s 52a contacts do not change

status of the recloser opened. After manual closing, Close Power Waiting time is over.

The Lockout State is cleared when the recloser has been manually closed by local/remote control and the reset time has expired. “Figure 7-3. Protection sequence containing 2F3D operations followed by lockout” shows 2F3D(2 Fast and three Delay) operation and lockout result. The total number of operation is set for 5times and Fast curve operation is set for 2 times. (3 times operation works with Delay Curve)

[OTHERS] Reset T(LO): 10.0 >C/P Wait: 60.00[1.00~600.00:0.01s]



(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC(Fast) (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time (3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC(Fast) (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time (5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC(Delay) (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time (7) 4th Trip - 4th TCC(Delay) (8) 4th Reclose Interval Time (9) 5th Trip - 5th TCC(Delay)

Figure 7-3. Protection sequence containing 2F3D operations followed by lockout

7.1.1.2. Reset

If the faulted current is cleared before the lockout condition, the reclosing sequence automatically reset after passing the reset time interval. If the fault condition occurs again during the reset time, the recloser will operate lockout after the completion of the remaining sequence.

“Figure 7-4. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared” shows that, after 3rd reclosing operation, the fault current is disappeared.

(1) 1st Trip - 1st TCC (2) 1st Reclose Interval Time (3) 2nd Trip - 2nd TCC (4) 2nd Reclose Interval Time (5) 3rd Trip - 3rd TCC (6) 3rd Reclose Interval Time

Figure 7-4. Reset Sequence operation after the 3rd reclosing as the fault current is cleared



7.1.2. Phase (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrents (51P) The ETR300-R has two phase time overcurrent elements. The phase time overcurrent element contained in the ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The phase time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The phase time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the phase time overcurrent element to respectively coordinate with other protection elements in the ETR300-R and other external devices on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are included in the ETR300-R. A User Programmable curve option is also available for user to allow creating custom’s time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The phase time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote control or via SCADA, the phase time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.



The following setting is used to program the phase fast time overcurrent element.

Phase Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / Phase

Range OFF, 10 ~ 1600A

Default 500A Step 1

Set the pickup current of Phase Time Overcurrent Elements.

Phase Fast Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Curve

Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S

Default Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : ANSI-NI

Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : ANSI-VI

Select the desired curve type :

ANSI - ANSI-NI : ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse - ANSI-VI : ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse - ANSI-EI : ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse

IEC - IEC-NI : IEC Normally Inverse - IEC-VI : IEC Very Inverse - IEC-EI : IEC Extremely Inverse

ES - ES-NI : KEPCO Normally Inverse - ES-VI : KEPCO Very Inverse

Definite Time : DEF-1s, DEF-10s KERI Curve : N1, N2, N3, N4 User curves : USER-1,USER-2,USER-3,USER-4 McGraw-Edison : Non Standard Curves 32

[PHASE FAST] >Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 1.00 [curves : total 50]

[PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 500 Ground: 250 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]



Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range

Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Curve A(101) B(117) C(133) D(116) E(132) IEC-EI K(162) L(107) M(118) N(104)

Setting 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Curve IEC-NI P(115) R(105) T(161) V(137) IEC-VI W(138) Y(120) Z(134) 1(102)

Setting 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Curve 2(135) 3(140) 4(106) 5(114) 6(136) 7(152) 8(113) 8*(111) 9(131) 11(141)

Setting 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Curve 13(142) 14(119) 15(112) 16(139) 18(151) N1 N2 N3 N4 ANSI-NI

Setting 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

Curve ANSI-VI ANSI-EI ES-NI ES-VI USER-1 USER-2 USER-3 USER-4 DEF-1S DEF-10S

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Time Dial

Range 0.05 ~ 15.00


Select Time dial, multiplying this value to selected curve. Multiplying this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after Time Add application.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Time Add

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec


Select Time adder, it is adding set value on the curve. T-C curve delay time is increased as much as Time adder value.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / M.R.T

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec


T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.

[PHASE FAST] Time Add: 0.00>M.R.T: 0.00[0.00~10.00:0.01s]

[PHASE FAST] Time Dial: 0.50>Time Add: 0.00[0.00~10.00:0.01s]

[PHASE FAST] Curve: [ANSI-NI]>Time Dial: 1.00[0.05~15.00:0.01]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Reset Method

Range INST, LINEAR

Default INST Step ~

In case that a fault current is decreased under Pickup level, Phase Fast overcurrent protection is reset.

INST : After 1 cycle, Reset. LINEAR : When the fault value is reached at selected curve’s

Rt(Reset characteristic constant) value, Reset.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PHASE FAST / Low Set Definite Time

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600sec

Default OFF Step 1sec

Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation.

Phase Delay Setup

The phase delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the phase fast time overcurrent setting process.

[PHASE FAST] >M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST >Low Set DT: OFF

[PHASE FAST] M.R.T: 0.00 >Reset Method: INST [INST/LINEAR]



7.1.3. Ground (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (51G) The ETR300-R has two ground time overcurrent elements. The ground time overcurrent element in the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground time overcurrent element is the most commonly used as a protective element for distribution systems and also used in both down-line and back-up recloser protection. The ground time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping that is used for an inverse time curve characteristic coordinated with current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. This inverse characteristic means that time overcurrent element operates slowly on small values of current above the pickup value and operates faster when current increases significantly above the pickup value. The ground time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the ground time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements within the ETR300-R and other external devices on the distribution system. ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER and non-standard time current curves are included in the ETR300-R. A User Programmable curve option is also available allowing the user to create customer time current curves for more enhanced coordination than the standard curve types. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The ground time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the current level measured by the ETR300-R drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote control or via SCADA, the ground time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.



The following setting is used to program the ground time overcurrent element.

Ground Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / Ground

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default 250A Step 1

Set the pickup current of Ground Time Overcurrent Elements.

Ground Fast Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Curve

Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S



Select the desired curve type : For more details, refer to “Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range ”

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Time Dial

Range 0.05 ~ 15.00


Select Time dial, multiplying this value to selected curve. Multiplying this value changes the slope of the curve. Time dial is conducted after Time Adder application.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Time Add

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec


Select Time adder, it is adding set value on the curve. T-C curve delay time is increased as much as Time add value.

[GROUND FAST] Time Dial: 1.00 >Time Add: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]

[GROUND FAST] Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 1.00 [0.05~15.00:0.01]

[GROUND FAST] >Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 1.00 [curves : total 50]

[PICKUP CURRENT] >Phase: 500 >Ground: 250 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / M.R.T

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec


T-C curve trip operation is faster than trip time, this set value is added to T-C curve for more delay. This function can be useful for other protective device and line fuse coordination.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Reset Method

Range INST, LINEAR

Default INST Step ~

In case that a fault current is decreased under Pickup level, Phase Time Over-Current Elements is reset.



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / GROUND FAST / Low Set Definite Time

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 600sec

Default OFF Step 1sec

Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation.

Ground Delay Setup The ground delay time overcurrent settings process is very similarly to the ground fast time overcurrent setting process.

[GROUND FAST] >M.R.T: 0.00>Reset Method: INST>Low Set DT: OFF

[GROUND FAST] M.R.T: 0.00>Reset Method: INST[INST/LINEAR]

[GROUND FAST] Time Add: 0.00>M.R.T: 0.00[0.00~10.00:0.01s]



7.1.4. Sensitive Earth Fault (51SEF) The sensitive earth fault (SEF) is applicable to systems that have restricted current flow for phase to earth fault. The SEF is not applicable to the case in 4 wire multi-earthed systems. The sensitivity of SEF element for non-earthed systems is dependent upon available fault current and the accuracy of CTs. For SEF element, ETR300-R has the separate SEF terminal on side panel. This input can be connected in series with the provided phase CT’s(standard) or connected to a separate window type ZCT. The SEF element provides a definite time delay versus current . The SEF element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED and SEF ENABLED on user interface panel. For user systems, a directional SEF is available. The directional control is polarized by a zero sequence voltage(V0). The CVD or PTs should be connected Wye-grounded. The SEF element in the following three settings should be enabled.

SEF Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / S.E.F

Range 0(OFF), 0.1~160.0

Default OFF Step 0. 1A

Set the pickup current of SEF Elements. In the case of ZCT, 0.1~160.0A as pickup current is configurable, while in the case of general purpose CT, it’s recommended not to set below 2A as pickup current.

SEF Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 180.0 sec


SEF delay time set. If it is set for 0, SET element trips immediately on pickup.

[SEF ELEMENT] >Time Delay: 5.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]

[PICKUP CURRENT] >SEF: OFF Neq Seq: 500 [(0)OFF,0.1~160.0A]



7.1.5. Negative Sequence (Fast/Delay) Time Overcurrent (46) The ETR300-R has two negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence element measures the amount of unbalance current in the system. The negative sequence overcurrent element can also be used to detect phase to ground and two phase ground faults. The negative sequence time overcurrent element provides a time delay versus current for tripping using that an inverse time curve characteristic is operated to coordinate, current pickup value, curve type, time dial, time adder, minimum response time setting and reset type. The negative sequence time overcurrent element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. Multiple time curves and time dials are available for the negative sequence time overcurrent element to closely coordinate with other protection elements in the ETR300-R and other external devices on the distribution system. The Reset type can be either instantaneous or linear. The negative sequence time delay reset mode applies to the ANSI, IEC, ESB, USER curves. The instantaneous mode is used to coordinate with other instantaneous reset devices such as a recloser or other protective equipment on the distribution system. In the instantaneous mode, the time overcurrent element will reset instantaneously when the measured current level drops below the pickup setting for one cycle. Linear reset mode, the recloser is used for the cooperation with the protection device necessary for delay time as mechanical relay reset. If the recloser is closed by pressing the CLOSE button on the front panel, or by an remote control or via SCADA, the negative sequence time overcurrent element is prevented from tripping for a period specified by the Cold load pickup scheme.

NEG Seq Pickup Current Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / PICKUP CURRENT / NEG Seq

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default 500 Step 1A

Set the pickup current of NEG Seq Time Overcurrent Elements.

[PICKUP CURRENT] >SEF: 0FF>Neq Seq: 400[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]



NEG Seq’ Function

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FUNC/ Function

Range OFF, TR, AL, TR&AR

Default OFF Step ~

If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = TR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP condition, Trip operates.

If function = AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a ALARM condition, Trip operates.

If function = TR&AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TR& AR condition, it trips and alarms.

NEG Seq Fast Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Curve

Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S



Select the desired curve type . For more details, refer to “Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range ”

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Dial

Range 0.05 ~ 15.00


Set Time dial which multiplies to a selected curve. It is performed after Time Adder application. Time dial changes the slope of the curve.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Time Add

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec


Set a time adder. It is added to a selected curve. It is added on to T-C curve delay time.

[NEG SEQ FAST] Time Dial: 0.50 >Time Add: 0.00 [0.00~10.00:0.01s]

[NEG SEQ FAST] Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 0.50 [0.05~15.00:0.01]

[NEG SEQ FAST] >Curve: [ANSI-NI] >Time Dial: 0.50 [curves : total 50]

[NEG SEQ FUNCTION] >Function : OFF [OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / M.R.T

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec


Minimum Response Time setting. T-C curve trip time is faster than set value, this set time will be used as delay time for trip. This function is used for coordination with other device or Fuse.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Reset Method

Range INST, LINEAR

Default INST Step ~

If a fault current is decreased under Pickup level, Phase Fast overcurrent element reset is made.



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / NEG SEQ FAST / Low Set Definite Time

Range OFF, 1 ~ 600sec

Default OFF Step 1sec Low set definite time is used to restrict a trip time to be a definite time adjacent to a pickup current by T-C curve. When the trip time is greater than the low set definite time, low set definite time is applied for operation.

NEG Seq Delay Setup

The negative sequence delay time overcurrent setting process is very similar the negative sequence fast time overcurrent setting process.

[NEG SEQ FAST] >M.R.T: 0.00>Reset Method: INST>Low Set DT: OFF

[NEG SEQ FAST] M.R.T: 0.00>Reset Method: INST[INST/LINEAR]

[NEG SEQ FAST] Time Add: 0.00>M.R.T: 0.00[0.00~10.00:0.01s]



7.1.6. Phase High Current Trip (50P-1) The ETR300-R has a phase high current trip element. The phase high current trip element in the ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of phase high current trip element should be set for equal to or faster than the phase time overcurrent elements. The phase high current trip element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION ENABLED on user interface panel. Phase high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The phase high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for phase high current trip.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-PHA / Sequence

Range 0(OFF), 1~5 shot

Default 1 Step 1shot

If Sequence = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Sequence = 1, then Phase High current trip is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-PHA / Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A

Default 4000 Step 1A

Set the pickup current of Phase High current Trip Elements. This value is the minimum operating current of Phase High current Trip Elements.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-PHA / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 1.00 sec


Set Time Delay for Phase High current trip. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on phase high current without delay.

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~1.00:0.01s]

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0(OFF),10~20000:1A]

[ H/C TRIP-PHA ] >Sequence: 1 >Pickup: 4000 [0(OFF),1~5:1]



7.1.7. Ground High Current Trip (50G-1) The ETR300-R has a ground high current trip element. The ground high current trip element in the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of ground high current trip overcurrent element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground time overcurrent elements. The ground high current trip element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel. Ground high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground high current trip.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-GND / Sequence



If Sequence = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Sequence = 1, then Ground High current trip is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-GND / Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000A

Default 4000 Step 1 A

Set the pickup current of Ground High current Trip Elements. This value is the minimum operating current of Ground High current Trip Elements.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-GND / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 1.00 sec


Set Time Delay for Ground High current trip. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on ground high current without delay.

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Pickup: 4000>Time Delay: 0.00[0.00~1.00:0.01s]

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Pickup: 4000>Time Delay: 0.00[0(OFF),10~20000:1A]

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Sequence: 1>Pickup: 4000[0(OFF),1~5:1]



7.1.8. Negative Sequence High Current Trip (46(50)-1) The negative sequence high current trip in the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The negative sequence high current trip element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of negative sequence high current trip element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence time overcurrent elements. The negative sequence high current trip element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and PROTECTION on user interface panel. The negative sequence high current trip is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The ground high current trip element in the following five settings should be enabled for negative sequence high current trip.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Sequence



If Sequence = OFF, the feature is not operate. If Sequence = 1, then Negative Seq’ High current trip is enabled for the first trip operation and every following trip operation.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A


Set the pickup current of Negative Seq’ High current Trip Elements. This value is the minimum operating current of Negative Seq High current Trip Elements.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C TRIP-NEQ / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 1.00 sec


Set Time Delay for Negative Seq’ High current trip. If it is set for 0, trips immediately on ground high current without delay.

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~1.00:0.01s]

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Pickup: 4000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0(OFF),10~20000:1A]

[ H/C TRIP-GND ] >Sequence: 1 >Pickup: 4000 [0(OFF),1~5:1]



7.1.9. Phase High Current Lockout (50P-2) The ETR300-R has a phase high current lockout element. The phase high current lockout element in the ETR300-R is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The phase high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current. When high current lockout element is enabled, high current lockout element is operated prior to any other phase protection elements. If a fault current is higher than the pickup setting value, Lockout is operated. The phase high current lockout element can be set by a number of its active trip that is applied to the full operation to lockout, time delay and fault current. This function is very useful to prevent widespread line faults due to reclosing operations in case of permanent fault. The operating time of phase high current lockout element should be set for equal to or faster than and phase high current trip element. The phase high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate setting and PROTECTION ENABLED in user interface panel. The phase high current lockout element is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The phase high current lockout element in the following five setting should be enabled for phase high current trip.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Function

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~5shot


If set 1 or other number, on this shot Lockout function is activated. For instance, if it is set for 3 short, during sequence, from third reclosing point, Lockout function is activated.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A


Set the pickup curent of Phase High Current Lockout Elements.

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Function: OFF>Pickup: 8000[0(OFF),10~20000:1A]

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] >Function: 1 Pickup: 8000[0(OFF),1~5:1]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-PHA / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 1.00 sec


Phase high current Lockout operation delay time setting. If it is set for 0, phase high current lockout element operate and lockouts immediately on pickup.

[ H/C LOCKOUT-PHA ] Pickup: 8000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~1.00:0.01s]



7.1.10. Ground High Current Lockout (50G-2) The ETR300-R has a ground high current lockout element. The ground high current lockout element in the ETR300-R, is set based on CT secondary current as connected to the current inputs. The ground high current lockout element provides a definite time delay versus current. The operating time of ground high current lockout overcurrent element should be set for equal to or faster than the ground high current trip element. The ground high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel. The ground high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The ground high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for ground high current lockout.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Function

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 5shot



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-GND / Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A


Set the pickup curent of Ground High Current Lockout Elements.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT- GND / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 1.00 sec


Ground high current lockout operation delay time set. If it is set for 0, it operates immediately and lockouts on pickup.

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Pickup(xCT): 4000>Time Delay: 0.00[0.00~1.00:0.01s]

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] Function: OFF>Pickup: 8000[0(OFF),10~20000:1A]

[ H/C LOCKOUT-GND ] >Function: 1 Pickup: 8000[0(OFF),1~5:1]



7.1.11. Negative Sequence High Current Lockout (46(50)-2) The negative sequence high current lockout element should be set equal to or faster than the negative sequence high current trip element. The negative sequence high current lockout element is enabled in the Primary, Alternate settings and both PROTECTION ENABLED and GROUND ENABLED in user interface panel. Negative sequence high current lockout is not affected by the cold load pickup scheme. The negative sequence high current lockout element in the following five settings should be enabled for the negative sequence high current lockout.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-NEG / Function

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 5shot



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-NEG / Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000 A


Set the pickup curent of Negative Sequence High Current Lockout Elements.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / H/C LOCKOUT-NEG / Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 1.00 sec


Negative sequence high current lockout operation delay time set. If it is set for 0, it operates immediately and lockouts on pickup.

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG ] Pickup: 8000 >Time Delay: 0.00 [0.00~1.00:0.01s]

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG ] Function: OFF >Pickup: 8000 [0(OFF),10~20000:1A]

[ H/C LOCKOUT-NEG ] >Function: 1 Pickup: 8000 [0(OFF),1~5:1]



7.1.12. Cold Load Pickup The cold load pickup function is used to prevent the recloser from incorrectly operating caused by the restoration of load supply or the cold load current of load side. ETR300-R provides “CLPU-Type 1” to prevent the recloser from operating wrong by instantaneous inrush current occurring by the closing of device on a power line and “CLPU-Type 2” to prevent protection elements from operating wrong by the cold load current caused by applying voltage to a transformer, a reactor or a long-distance line.

7.1.12.1. Cold Load Pickup – Type 1

The settings of “CLPU-Type 1” are separated and set respectively for phase, ground, SEF or negative phase over current element. In the state of the function to restrain the inrush current activated, the overcurrent protection element will be operated under settings of “CLPU-Type 1” function at the restoration of load supply.

NOTE: According to setting of “Make use ‘I’”, the condition to decide the restoration of load supply will be changed. If “YES” is set, the decision is made when the load current becomes over 2A. If “NO” is set, the decision is made when a recloser is closed (51A) by local or remote control.

When a distributed system is closed after long-time outage, the inrush current over overcurrent pickup level may occur. At occurrence of the cold load pickup, ETR300-R increases the pickup level of overcurrent element during a certain period of time, the Fast overcurrent protection element is not operated and the Delay overcurrent protection element is always operated regardless of the cold load pickup function. (The High Current Trip and High Current Lockout are always operated regardless of the cold load pickup function) If a fault occurs on distributed system, an overcurrent protection element is operated by the cold load pickup function and a recloser becomes lockout after oneshot trip regardless of total number of shots. A power is lost and then after certain outage time, the algorithm of cold load pickup function is applied at the restoration of load supply. If the “Make use ‘1’” is set to be “YES”, the algorithm is applied when a load current becomes 0 and then it is restored after certain outage time. If “NO” is set, the algorithm is applied when a recloser is opened and then after certain outage time, the



recloser is closed manually. If the fault current over the cold load pickup level occurs, the protection element by the cold load pickup function is operated immediately. If the power loss (opening or load current loss) is sustained for a long time more than certain outage time, the pickup current of time overcurrent element is changed to be the setting value of the cold load pickup current. After the restoration of load supply (manually closing or restoration of load current), protection functions are normally operated when the Restore minimum time (RMT) is expired.

Figure 7-5. The Cold Load Pickup Characteristic

The cold load pickup function is operated according to the following rules. The setting to use the cold load pickup function is set to be ON (set to TRIP or TR&AR), the cold load pickup level is preset and then the cold load pickup function is activated at manual close or restoration of load current. If the level of over current occurring at the restoration of load supply is over the cold load pickup current, the Lockout is done by protection function after oneshot trip (Refer the Inrush Current 1 in “Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”). If the over current is below cold load pickup current and overcurrent pickup current, protection functions are not operated during a period of Restore minimum Time (RMT), (Refer the Inrush

Overcurrent Pickup Level

Cold loadPickup Level

Trip Area

Tim

e

Current

Delay Curve

Non Trip Area



Current 2 in “Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”). After RMT, the protection functions are operated. However, if the over current is dropped below overcurrent pickup current during the RMT, the cold load pickup function is reset after reset time (Refer the Inrush Current 3 in “Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic”).

Figure 7-6. The Restore Minimum Time Characteristic If high current trip and high current lockout functions are activated and the fault current is higher than the current setting of High current trip and high current lockout, the high current trip and high current lockout functions will be operated prior to the cold load pickup function.

Time

Current

Overcurrent

CLPU

Pickup Level

Pickup Level

Trip

Outage time Restore Minimum Time

Trip

Inrush current 1

Inrush current 2

Inrush current 3



7.1.12.2. Cold Load Pickup – Type 2

In the state of cold load, this type is used to restrain the operation of protection functions to over current occurring by change of load (the close of a switch on long-distance line, incoming heavy load etc.). This function to restrain protection functions rises or drops the pickup level of time overcurrent element during certain time (E-CLP time) defined by a user.

Over Current Pickup Level Step Up At power loss (a recloser is opened or a load current is 0A), the current of Over Current Pickup is risen as follows.

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛−−×

−+= )1'(1' MultiCLPE

TimeCLPETimeSupplyWithoutMultiLoadColdlOperationa

As example, when E-CLP Multi and E-CLT Time are set to be 3.0 and 60min respectively, over 30 min after power loss, the applied cold load multiple is 2. If the minimum working currentis set to be 200A, the current of Over Current Pickup becomes 400A, twice as much as the minimum working current. In addition, after 60 min, the cold load multiple is fixed to be 3.

Over Current Pickup Level Step Down If power is restored (manual closed or restoration of load current (over 2A)), the current of Over Current Pickup is dropped with the same speed when rising until the cold load multiple becomes 1. When E-CLP Multi and E-CLP Time are set to be 3.0 and 60 min respectively, the graph of the cold load multiple in “Figure 7-7. Cold Load Multipilier” is shown as follows.

NOTE:

The risen level of overcurrent pickup by multiple of cold load is the pickup level to operate overcurrent protection element. The standard current level of TC curve is a minimum working current.



Figure 7-7. Cold Load Multipilier

7.1.12.3. Cold Load Pickup Setup

The Cold Load Pickup feature in the following settings should be enabled.

CLPU COMMON Setup

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-PHA

Range OFF, ON

Default ON Step ~

OFF : Cold load pickup function on the phase does not operate. ON : Cold load pickup function on phase operates.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-GND

Range OFF, ON

Default ON Step ~

OFF : Cold load pickup function on the ground does not operate. ON : Cold load pickup function on ground operates.

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ]>Funct-PHA: ON>Funct-GND: ON[OFF/ON]

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ]>Funct-PHA: ON Funct-GND: ON[OFF/ON]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-NEG

Range OFF, ON

Default ON Step ~

OFF : Cold load pickup function on the Negative sequence does not operate.

ON : Cold load pickup function on the Negative sequence operates.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Func-SEF

Range OFF, ON

Default ON Step ~

OFF : Cold load pickup function on the SEF does not operate. ON : Cold load pickup function on the SEF operates.

CLPU-TYPE1 Setup This setting is to restrain the inrush current occurring at restoration of load supply.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / PHA(A)

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 20000A


Set phase inrush current restraint value. Pickup value is calculated by CT ratio times this set value.

※. NOTE : GND(A), NEG(A) and SEF(A), the same as SEF(A) above. But, default value of SEF(A) is 20.0A.

※. NOTE : In the case of ZCT, 0.1~160.0A as SEF is configurable, while in the case of general purpose CT, it’s recommended not to set below 2A as SEF.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Curve-PHA

Range A(101), B(117), ..., DEF-10S

Default N3 Step ~

Set T-C curve to apply when Phase in-rush current is more than few times of phase disconnect in-rush current. Applicable curve ragne refers to “Table 7-2. Recloser time-current operation characteristic setting range ”.

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >Curve-PHA: [ N3] >Time Dial-PHA: 1.00 [curves : total 50]

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >PHA(A): 2000 >Curve-PHA: [ N3] [0(OFF),1~20000:1A]

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >Funct-SEF: ON PHA(A): 2000 [OFF/ON]

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >Funct-GND: ON >Funct-NEG: ON [OFF/ON]



※. NOTE : Curve-GND and Curve –NEG, the same as Curve -PHA above.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Time Dial-PHA

Range 0.05 ~ 15.00


Set a coefficient to apply to a set curve. The coefficunet application changes the slop of a curve. Coefficient multiply works after Time Adder.

※. NOTE : Time Dial-GND and Time Dial-NEG, the same as Time Dial-PHA above.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Time Addr-PHA

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec


Adding a time onto a set curve. More delays due to this set time including its own delay time.

※. NOTE : Time Addr-GND and Time Addr-NEG, the same as Time Addr-PHA above..

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / M.R.T-PHA

Range 0.00 ~ 10.00 sec


Minimum response time. A set T-C curve is faster than this set time, tripping may be delayed as much as this set time. This function can be cooperated with other protection device or fuse.

※. NOTE : M.R.T-GND and M.R.T-NEG, the same as M.R.T-PHA above.

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Time Add-PHA: 0.00>M.R.T-PHA: 0.00[0.00~10.00:0.01s]

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Time Dial-PHA: 1.00>Time Addr-PHA: 0.00[0.00~10.00:0.01s]

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] Curve-PHA: [ N3]>Time Dial-PHA: 1.00[0.05~15.00:0.01]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Outage Time

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Set a time to disable Cold load pickup. When recloser opens, ‘Outage Time’ timer is operated. Within this set time, if recloser is closed, cold load pickup is not operated. After the set time, if recloser is closed, cold load pickup function is operated.

Figure 7-8. Outage time logic diagram

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Func-PHA

Range OFF, ON

Default ON Step ~

Set whether to use Phase Minimum operation current reset function.

ON : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT time), Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and phase overcurrent protection function operates(Pickup level is changed from Cold load pickup to Overcurrent pickup level).

OFF : After recloser close and after Restore Minimum Time(RMT time), Inrush current restraint algorithm remains. Lower than over current pickup level shall be kept for Cold load reset time(Rst Time-PHA set time) so that Inrush Current Restraint algorithm is stopped and over current protection function operates.

※. NOTE : RMT Func-GND, RMT Func-SEF and RMT Func-NEG, the same as RMT Func-PHA

above.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / RMT Time-PHA

Range Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : 0.00 ~ 60.00 sec

Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Select the restore minimum time required for the inrush load. The Restore Minimum Time have to raised pickup levels for overcurrent detection from cold load pickup value back to nominal pickup level.

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >RMT Func-PHA: ON >RMT Time-PHA: 3.00 [0.00~60.00:0.01s]

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >RMT Func-PHA: ON >RMT Time-PHA: 3.00 [OFF/ON]

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >SEF(A): 20.0 >Outage Time: 10.0 [0.00~600.00:0.01]



※. NOTE : RMT Time-GND, RMT Time-SEF and RMT Time-NEG, the same as RMT Time-PHA above.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Rst Time-PHA

Range Applicable for lower than Ver 3.4 of ETR300-R : 0.00 ~ 60.00 sec

Applicable for Ver 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Cold load pickup Reset Time setting on phase inrush current. Inrush current that is lower than over current pickup level, is kept for this set time, Inrush current restraint algorithm is stopped and normal over current protection function operates(Pickup level changes from Cold load pickup level to over current pickup level).

※. NOTE : Rst Time-GND, Rst Time-SEF and Rst Time-NEG, the same as Rst Time-PHA above.

CLPU-TYPE2 Setup This setup is to rise or drop the current for Over Current Pickup of a protection element

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / Make Use ‘I’

Range NO, YES

Default NO Step ~

This setting changes the point of time to activate a cold load pickup function.

If “YES” is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a load current is restored (over 2A).

If “NO” is set, the cold load pickup function is activated when a recloser is manually closed by local or remote control.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / E-CLP Multi’

Range 1.0~5.0


Set the multiple of cold load. If 1.0 is set, the cold load multiple is not applied and the setting of minimum working current is always applied for overcurrent pickup current.

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ]>Make Use ‘I’: NO>E-CLP Multi’: 2.0[1.0~5.0:0.1]

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ]>Rst Time-PHA: 3.00>Make Use ‘I’: NO[NO/YES]

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] RMT Time-PHA: 3.00>Rst Time-PHA: 3.00[0.00~60.00:0.01s]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / COLD LOAD PICKUP / E-CLP Time

Range 1~720min

Default 10 Step 1

Set the cold load time. During this set time, the overcurrent pickup level is risen or dropped.

[ COLD LOAD PICKUP ] >E-CLP Multi’: 2.0 >E-CLP Time(m): 10 [1~720:1m]



7.1.13. Directional Controls (67) The directional Controls provide time protection in the direction of power flow. The directional Controls are necessary for the protection of multiple feeders, when it has the necessity of finding faults in different directions. The directional controls are composed of phase, gound, sensitive ground, and negative sequence overcurrent elements. If directional controls are selected, it will determine whether current flow in each phase is in forward or reverse direction, as determined by the connection of the phase CTs, selected Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), voltage and current phasors. To increase security of all directional controls, add one power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation. The directional controls have each three settings. The directional controls settings can be different in the Primary and Alternate settings.

7.1.13.1. Phase Directional Controls (67P) Normal voltage V1 provides phase pole direction in Power line system. Phase direction is determined by comparing normal voltage(V1) and normal current(I1). If an angle between normal

voltage(V1) and normal current(I1) is within ± 90˚, the direction is forward otherwise it is backward(reverse direction). Maximum torque angle is set between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Max torque initial angle is set for lags Normal voltage V1 for∠60˚.( Initial set value of Max Torque angle shall be set ∠60˚ lagging angle. If Polarized voltage becomes lower than the Minimum polarized Voltage, phase direction control is lost and phase over current is not detected. On the other hand, if phase direction control is set for ‘NONE’, regardless of phase direction, phase over current is detected. Phase direction control type can be set in order to detect phase over current. Depending on control type, over current can be detected in Forward direction or reverse direction or regardless of direction. Following “Figure 7-9. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization” shows normal current (I1) direction polarity phasor diagram in complex plane.



Figure 7-9. Phasor Diagram for I1 Directional Polarization

The phase direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / Type

Range NONE, FORWARE, REVERSE

Default NONE Step ~

Set phase direction type.

NONE : Regardless of phase direction, over current is detected by normal current(I1).

FOR : Over current is detected when forward phase direction. REV : Over current is detected when reverse phase direction.

RIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / M.T.A(V1)

Range 0 ~ 359 degree

Default 60 Step 1 degree

Enter the Maximum Torque Angle. The Maximum Torque Angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarizing voltage. For typical distribution systems, the faulted angle of the phase will be

approximately ∠30∼∠60 degree.

[PHASE] Type: FOR >M.T.A(V1): 60 [0~359:1°Lag]

[PHASE] >Type: FOR M.T.A(V1): 60 [NONE/FOR/REV]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / M.P.V

Range 0(OFF), 10~80%

Default 30 Step 1%

To check Phase disconnect direction, it shall set Minimum Polarizing Voltage, V1). It is available to check the direction when a votage shall be more than this set value. Otherwise, checking is blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction is not checked.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / PHASE / BLOCK OC

Range NO, YES

Default NO Step ~

Select whether to trip when polarizing voltage is dropped below minimum polarizing voltage set.

NO : Trip on over current element. YES : No trip on over current element.

7.1.13.2. Ground Directional Controls (67G)

Zero phase voltage 3V0 provides ground control direction in power system. Ground direction is determined by comparing zero phase voltage (3V0) and zero phase current(I0). If an angle from zero phase voltage to zero phase current is within ± 90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is

forward direction, otherwise, reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Initial set value of max torque angle is set for ∠60˚ lagging compared with Zero sequence voltage(-V0). Polarized voltage drops Min. polarized voltage, ground direction control is cancelled and ground over current is not detected. On the other hand, if ground direction control is set for ‘NONE’, ground over current is detected regardless of direction. Ground direction control type is set to detect ground over current. Depending on control type, over current is detected or is not detected. Following figure shows phasor graph of zero phase current direction polarity in complex plane.

[PHASE] M.P.V: 30>BLOCK OC: NO[NO/YES]

[PHASE] M.T.A(V1): 60>M.P.V: 30[0(OFF),10~80:1%]



Figure 7-10. Phasor Graph for Ig Directional Polarization

The ground direction control in the following four settings should be enabled.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / Type


Default NONE Step ~

Set Ground direction type.

NONE : Regardless of ground direction, over current is detected by normal current(Ig).

FOR : Over current is detected when forward ground direction. REV : Over current is detected when reverse ground direction.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.T.A



Enter the maximum torque angle, The maximum torque angle setting determines the range of current direction for the polarized voltage. For system with high-resistance grounding or floating neutrals, the

ground maximum torque angle will be approximately ∠60degree. For system with solidly grounded or resistively grounded the maximum

torque angle will be approximately ∠90 degree.

[GROUND] Type: FOR >M.T.A(-V0): 60 [0~359:1°Lag]

[GROUND] >Type: FOR M.T.A(-V0): 60 [NONE/FOR/REV]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / M.P.V

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 80%

Default 30 Step 1%

Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check ground fault direction. Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction checking is disabled.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / GROUND / BLOCK OC

Range NO, YES

Default NO Step ~



※. NOTE : The SEF direction control process a very similar method to the ground directional controls. But, the default value of SEF directional element “Type” is Npne, and default value of “M.T.A(-V0) is “90°” .

7.1.13.3. Negative Sequence Directional Controls (67(46))

Negative Sequence voltage V2 provides negative sequence pole direction in power system. Negative sequence direction is determined by comparing negative sequence voltage(V2) and negative current(I2). If an angle from negative sequence voltage(V2) to negative sequence current(I2) is within ± 90˚ based on Maximum Torque Angle, it is forward direction, otherwise,

reverse direction. Maximum Torque Angle is between ∠0˚ and ∠359˚. Maximum Torque Angle initial set value leads from negative sequence voltage(V2) for ∠60˚. If polarizing voltage drops minimum polarizing voltage, negative sequence direction control is cancelled and over current is not detected. On the other hand, if negative sequence direction control type is set for ‘NONE’, over current is detected regardless of direction. Set negative sequence direction control type to detect negative sequence overcurrent. Depending on control type, overcurrent is detected in forward or reverse or both direction. Following figure shows phasor graph of negative sequence current(I2) direction polarity.

[GROUND] M.P.V: 30>BLOCK OC: NO[NO/YES]

[GROUND] M.T.A(-V0): 60>M.P.V: 30[0(OFF),10~80:1%]



REVERSE

FORWORD

Zero Torque Line

Figure 7-11. Phasor Diagram for I2 Directional Polarization

The negative sequence directional controls in the following four settings should be enabled.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / Type


Default NONE Step ~

Set Negative sequence direction type.

NONE : Regardless of negative sequence direction, over current is detected by normal current(I2).

FOR : Over current is detected when forward negative sequence direction.

REV : Over current is detected when reverse negative sequence direction.

[NEG SEQ] >Type: NONE M.T.A(-V2): 60 [NONE/FOR/REV]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / M.T.A



In case that negative sequence over current is occurred, Minimum Torque Angle of negative sequence current(I2) against zero phase voltage(V2) is set

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / M.P.V

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 80%

Default 30 Step 1%

Set Minimum Polarizing Voltage to check Negative Sequence. Voltage shall be higher than this set value to check the direction. Otherwise, direction check will be blocked. In case of setting 0(OFF), direction checking is disabled.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DIRECTION / NEG SEQ / BLOCK OC

Range NO, YES

Default NO Step ~



[NEG SEQ] M.P.V: 30>BLOCK OC: NO[NO/YES]

[NEG SEQ] M.T.A(-V0): 60>M.P.V: 30[0(OFF),10~80:1%]

[NEG SEQ] Type: NONE >M.T.A(-V2): 60[0~359:1°Lag]



7.1.14. Undervoltage (27) In case that nominal voltage is kept below a certain voltage for a certain time, two undervoltage elements make a trip operation. Undervoltage element is set in Primary or Alternate setting group. It is available to select a number of phase to be checked for undervoltage function. The undervoltage element can be used to supervise that torque control other overcurrent protective elements. When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the undervoltage element is disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all undervoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.

Undervoltage 1 Setup The undervoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 Func’

Range OFF, TR, AL, TR&AL

Default OFF Step ~

If function = OFF, the feature is not operational. If function = Trip, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TR condition, the device trips.

If function = AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a AR condition, the device gives the alarm.

If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 Pickup

Range 0.10 ~ 1.40


Enter the pickup value as a fraction of the secondary nominal voltage. For example, if the secondary nominal voltage is 100V, and an alarm is

required whenever the voltage goes below 80V, enter(80/100) = 0.80 × VT for the pickup.

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >UV1 Func’: OFF >UV1 Pickup: 0.80 [0.10~1.40:0.01]

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >UV1 Func’: OFF >UV1 Pickup: 0.80 [OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Select the definite time delay.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / Voltage Type

Range 1P, 2P, 3P

Default 1P Step ~

Set a number of phase to be detected for Undervoltage1 and Over-voltage1.

1P : More than 1 phase is detected with more than pickup voltage. 2P : More than 2 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage. 3P : More than 3 phases are detected with more than pickup voltage.

※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / Min. V

Range 0.10 ~ 1.40 xVT(secondary nominal voltage)

Default 0.10 Step 0.01 xVT

Enter the minimum voltage for the undervoltage and overvoltage. Used to prevent the undervoltage1 element and overvoltage1 element for voltage below this level. Setting to 0.10 xVT will allow a dead line to be considered a trip condition.


PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / NVCL Func’

Range OFF, ON

Default OFF Step -

Select ON/OFF to make Close operation when the linve voltage becomes back normal voltage. ※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >NVCL Func’: OFFNVCL TD: 30 [0FF/ON]

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >Voltage Type: 1P>Min. V: 0.10[0.10~1.40:0.01pu]

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >OV1 Delay: 5.00>Voltage Type: 1P[1P/2P/3P]

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] UV1 Pickup: 0.80>UV1 Delay: 5.00[0.00~600.00:0.01s]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / NVCL TD

Range 0 ~ 60000sec


Set a delay time for close operation when normal voltage returns. ※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overvoltage1 element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / NVCL TD

Range 0 ~ 60000sec


After under/over voltage 1 trip, this setting time later, if line voltage does not come back to normal, NVCL function does not operate.


PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / UV1 NVCL Lv



Set the lower bound of normal voltage.


PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 NVCL Lv



Set the upper bound of normal voltage.


Undervoltage 2 Setup The undervoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the undervoltage 1.

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >UV1 NVCL Lv: 0.95 >OV1 NVCL Lv: 1.05 [0.10~1.40:0.01pu]

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >UV1 NVCL Lv: 0.95 >OV1 NVCL Lv: 1.05 [0.10~1.40:0.01pu]

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >NVCL TD: 30 >NVCL Rst TD: 30 [0~60000:1s]

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >NVCL Func’: OFF >NVCL TD: 30 [0~60000:1s]



7.1.15. Overvoltage (59) In case that nominal voltage is kept higher than a certain voltage for a certain time, two overvoltage elements makes a trip operation. Overvoltage element is set in Primary or Alternate setting group. It is available to select a number of phase to be checked for overvoltage function. When the circuit breaker is closed by a local/remote controls, the overvoltage element is disabled from detecting for the cold load pickup during periods. To increase security, all overvoltage elements add two power frequency cycle of intentional delay to prevent incorrect operation.

Overvoltage 1 Setup The overvoltage 1 should be enabled to the following settings.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 Func’


Default OFF Step ~


If function = AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a AR condition, the device gives the alarm.

If function = Trip & AR, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 Pickup




required whenever the voltage exceeds 110 V, enter (110/100) = 1.10 × VT for the pickup.

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >OV1 Func’: OFF>OV1 Pickup: 1.10[0.10~1.40:0.01pu]

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] >OV1 Func’: OFF>OV1 Pickup: 1.10[OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / VOLTAGE / UNDER/OVER VOLT1 / OV1 Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec



※. NOTE ) The closing function seting is applied equally as the under voltage 1 element in case of Overvoltage detect phase number, min. operation voltage and normal voltage reset. Refer to “7.1.14. Undervoltage(27)” avout the related setting item.

Overvoltage 2 Setup The overvoltage 2 settings process a very similar method to the overvoltage 1.

[UNDER/OVER VOLT1] OV1 Pickup: 1.10 >OV1 Delay: 5.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]



7.1.16. Underfrequency Load Shedding (81U) The underfrequency load shedding element is activated to trip when the distribution system frequency drops below a specified frequency pickup for a specified time. The power system frequency is measured from the zero crossing on the VA-N voltage input for Wye connected VTs

and VA-B voltage for Delta connected VTs.(If VTs is delta connection(Δ ), VA-B voltage is zero crossing and if wye connection(Y), VA-N voltage zero crossing to measure frequency.) The underfrequency minimum voltage and underfrequency minimum current are used to prevent incorrect operation when the recloser is closed by a local/remote control and the underfrequency load shedding is disabled from tripping for cold load pickup during periods. The underfrequency load shedding element should be enabled to the following settings.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / UF Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

Default OFF Step 0.01 Hz

Enter the level of which the underfrequency element is to pickup. For

example, if the system frequency is 50, and load shedding is required at 59.5, enter 59.50 for this setting.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / UF TD

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / Min. V

Range 0.00 ~ 1.25 xVT


Enter the minimum voltage required to allow the underfrequency element and overfrequency to Operate.

※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / Min. I

Range 0(OFF), 1 ~ 630A

Default 0 Step 1A

Enter the minimum value of current required for any phase to allow the underfrequency element and overfrequency to operate.

※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] >Min.V: 0.10>Min.I: 0[0(OFF),0~630:1A]

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] OF TD: 2.00 >Min.V: 0.10[0.00~1.25:0.01pu]

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] >UF Pickup: OFF >UF TD: 2.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] >UF Pickup: OFF >UF TD: 2.00 [0(OFF),40.00~65.00]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / NFCL Func’

Range OFF, ON

Default OFF Step -

Select ON/OFF to make Close operation when the frequency becomes back normal voltage. ※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / NFCL TD

Range 0 ~ 60000sec

Default 30 Step 1sec Set a delay time on closing after frequency becomes normal. ※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / NFCL Rst TD

Range 0 ~ 60000sec

Default 30 Step 1sec After under/over frequency trip, this setting time later, if line voltage does not come back to normal, NFCL function does not operate. ※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / UF NFCL Lv

Range 40.00 ~ 65.00Hz

Default 59.80 Step 0.01Hz

Set the lower bounder of normal frequency. ※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / OF NFCL Lv

Range 40.00 ~ 65.00Hz

Default 60.20 Step 0.01 Hz Set the upper bounder of normal frequency. ※. NOTE ) This setting is applied equally in Overfrequency element.

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] >UF NFCL Lv: 59.80 >OF NFCL Lv: 60.20 [40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] >UF NFCL Lv: 59.80 >OF NFCL Lv: 60.20 [40.00~65.00:0.01Hz]

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] >NFCL TD: 30 >NFCL Rst TD: 30 [0~60000:1s]

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] >NFCL Func’: OFF >NFCL TD: 30 [0~60000:1s]

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] >NFCL Func’: OFF NFCL TD: 30 [0FF/ON]



7.1.17. Overfrequency Load Shedding (81O) In case that overfrequency is kept higher than a certain frequency for a certain time, overfrequency element makes a trip operation.

Overfrequency element is set in Primary or Alternate setting group. If VTs is deltaΔ - connection VA-B is to be zero-crossing and if Y connection, VA-N.is to be zero-crossing. Overfrequency Minimum voltage and minimum current is used to prevent mal-operation when recloser is closed locally or remotely. During inrush current restraint algorithm running, overfrequency load shedding function does not operate. Overfrequency settings are as follows.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / OF Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 40.00 ~ 65.00 Hz

Default OFF Step 0.01 Hz

Enter the level of overfrequency elements.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / FREQUENCY/ UNDER/OVER FREQ’ / OF TD

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec



※. NOTE ) Closing function setting in case of overfrequency min. operating voltage, min. operating current and normal frequency reset is applied same as unerfrequency element. Refer to “7.1.16. Underfrequency Load Shedding(81U)” for related setting item.

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] >OF Pickup: OFF >OF TD: 2.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

[UNDER/OVER FREQ’] >OF Pickup: OFF >OF TD: 2.00 [0(OFF),40.00~65.00]



7.1.18. Time Overcurrent Curves The ETR300-R is equipped Standard ANSI/IEEE curves, IEC curves, ESB curves , user-defined curves and all 32 non standard recloser curves are available. The operation times and reset times refer to ANSI/IEEE C37.112 and IEC 255-3.

The operation times and reset times are defined as follows :

ANSI/IEEE Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA)

IEC Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1)) + TA)

ESB Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA)

USER-DEFINED Trip Time(Sec) = TD × ( (α / (Mβ-1) + γ) + TA) Reset Time(Sec) = TD × (Rt / (1-M2))

Table 7-3. Curve Factor

TD Time dial

TA Time adder

α, β, γ Characteristic constant

M Multiples of pickup current

Rt Reset characteristic constant

NOTE : 1) “Time Dial” and “Time Adder” settings of each Time Overcurrent(Fast/Delay) menu are

applied to Time dial(TD) and Time adder(TA) respectively. 2) “Recloser clearing time curves” are used when rated voltage of recloser is 15 or 27,

otherwise which added 30(±4) are used when it is 38.



Related Setting Menu Set user curves. 4 user curves are provided(USER CURVE 1~4). 1) USER CURVE 1

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor a

Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999


User defined curve factor α

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor b

Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999


User defined curve factor β

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor r

Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999


User defined curve factor γ

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / USER CURVE / USER CURVE 1 / Factor rt

Range 0.0000 ~ 150.9999


User defined curve factor rt

2) USER CURVE 2, 3, 4 :

USER CURVE 2 ~ 4, the same as USER CURVE 1 above

[USER CURVE 1] Factor r: 1.8000>Factor rt: 59.5000[0~150.9999:0.0001]

[USER CURVE 1] Factor b: 2.0200>Factor r: 1.8000[0~150.9999:0.0001]

[USER CURVE 1] Factor a: 59.5000>Factor b: 2.0200[0~150.9999:0.0001]

[USER CURVE 1] >Factor a: 59.5000 Factor b: 2.0200[0~150.9999:0.0001]



Standard Curve Coefficients

Table 7-4. ANSI/IEEE

Curves α β γ Rt

Moderately Inverse 0.0107 0.020 0.0231 1.0700

Normally Inverse 5.9500 2.000 0.18 5.9500

Very Inverse 3.985 2.000 0.095 3.985

Extremely Inverse 5.9100 2.000 0.0345 5.9100

Short Time Inverse 3.56e-3 0.02 1.95e-2 0.356

Short Time Very Inverse 1.9925 2.000 0.0475 1.992

Table 7-5. IEC

Curves α β γ Rt

Standard Inverse 0.1400 0.0200 0.0 9.700

Very Inverse 13.500 1.000 0.0 13.500

Extremely Inverse 80.000 2.000 0.0 80.000

Long Time Inverse 135.000 1.000 0.0 135.00

Short Time Inverse 0.0500 0.0400 0.0 0.500

Table 7-6. ESB

Curves α β γ Rt

Standard Inverse 0.011 0.02 0.042 9.000

Very Inverse 3.985 1.95 0.1084 3.985

Long Time Very Inverse 15.94 1.95 0.4336 15.94

Table 7-7. User Defined

Curves α β γ Rt

User1 59.5000 2.0200 1.8000 59.5000

User2 59.5000 2.0200 1.8000 59.5000

User3 59.5000 2.0200 1.8000 59.5000

User4 59.5000 2.0200 1.8000 59.5000



Table 7-8. Definite Time

Curves α β γ Rt

Definite Time 1sec 0.0 - 1.0 1.0

Definite Time 10sec 0.0 - 10.0 10.0

Table 7-9. Non Standard Curves

McGraw-Edison recloser curves

Phase Ground

Old New Old New

A 101 1 102

B 117 2 135

C 133 3 140

D 116 4 106

E 132 5 114

K 162 6 136

L 107 7 152

M 118 8 113

N 104 8* 111

P 115 9 131

R 105 11 141

T 161 13 142

V 137 14 119

W 138 15 112

Y 120 16 139

Z 134 18 151

Table 7-10. KEPCO Curvers

Curves

N1, N2, N3, N4



Curves

Table 7-11. Curve Characteristics

*. Curve time is Clearing Time.

*. Operation accuracy is +/-10% or +/-10.

Table 7-12. Curve List

No Curve No Curve No Curve

1 A(101) 18 Y(120) 35 18(151)

2 B(117) 19 Z(134) 36 N1

3 C(133) 20 1(102) 37 N2

4 D(116) 21 2(135) 38 N3

5 E(132) 22 3(140) 39 N4

6 IEC-EI 23 4(106) 40 ANSI-NI

7 K(162) 24 5(114) 41 ANSI-VI

8 L(107) 25 6(136) 42 ANSI-EI

9 M(118) 26 7(152) 43 ES-NI

10 N(104) 27 8(113) 44 ES-VI

11 IEC-NI 28 8*(111) 45 USER-1

12 P(115) 29 9(131) 46 USER-2

13 R(105) 30 11(141) 47 USER-3

14 T(161) 31 13(142) 48 USER-4

15 V(137) 32 14(119) 49 DEF-1S

16 IEC-VI 33 15(112) 50 DEF-10S

17 W(138) 34 16(139)



1) ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves

Figure 7-12. ANSI/IEEE Moderately Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

7.00

9.0011.00

1.00

0.05

13.00

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI MODERATELY INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

15.00

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)

PERCENTAGE OF PICKUP CURRENT



2) ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

Figure 7-13. ANSI/IEEE Normally Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

7.00

9.0011.00

1.00

0.50

13.00

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI NORMALLY INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

15.00

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




3) ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves

Figure 7-14. ANSI/IEEE Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

7.00

9.0011.00

1.00

0.50

13.00

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI VERY INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

15.00

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




4) ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

Figure 7-15. ANSI/IEEE Extremely Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

7.00

9.00

11.00

1.00

0.50

13.00

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI EXTREMELY INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

15.00TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




5) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves

Figure 7-16. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

7.00

9.0011.00

1.00

0.50

13.00

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI SHORT TIME INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

15.00

TIM

E(S

ECO

ND

S)




6) ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves

Figure 7-17. ANSI/IEEE Short Time Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

7.00

9.00

11.00

1.00

0.50

13.00

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ANSI SHOTR TIME VERY INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

15.00

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




7) IEC Standard Inverse Curves

Figure 7-18. IEC Standard Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

0.05

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.60.70.8

1

0.5

0.1

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC STANDARD INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




8) IEC Very Inverse Curves

Figure 7-19. IEC Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.09

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

0 . 0 5

0 . 1

0 . 2

0 . 3

0 . 4

0 . 50 . 60 . 7

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC VERY INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

0 . 8

1 . 0 0

TIM

E(S

ECO

ND

S)




9) IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

Figure 7-20. IEC Extremely Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

0 . 0 5

0 . 10 . 2

0 . 3

0 . 4

0 . 5

0 . 60 . 7

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC EXTREMELY INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

0 . 81 . 0 0

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




10) IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

Figure 7-21. IEC Long Time Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

0 . 0 5

0 . 1

0 . 2

0 . 3

0 . 4

0 . 50 . 60 . 7

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC LONG TIME VERY INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

0 . 8

1 . 0 0

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




11) IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

Figure 7-22. IEC Short Time Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.09

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

1.000.80.70.6

0.5

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.1

0.05

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : IEC SHORT TIME INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

TIM

E(S

ECO

ND

S)




12) ESB Inverse Curves

Figure 7-23. ESB Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.09

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

0.50

1.00

2.00

3.00

5.00

4.00

7.00

9.00

11.00

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ESB INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

13.0015.00

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




13) ESB Very Inverse Curves

Figure 7-24. ESB Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

7.00

9.00

11.00

1.00

0.05

13.00

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ESB VERY INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% 0.01 SECONDS

15.00

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




14) ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves

Figure 7-25. ESB Long Time Very Inverse Curves

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

2.00

3.00

4.00

5.00

7.00

9.0011.00

1.00

0.50

13.00

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : ESB LONG TIME VERY INVERSECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

15.00

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




15) Definite Time Curves (DEF-1S, DEF-10S)

Figure 7-26. Definite Time Curves (D1, D2)

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.09

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

D1

D2

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : D1, D2CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

TIM

E(S

ECO

ND

S)




16) KEPCO Curves(N1, N2, N3, N4)

Figure 7-27. KEPRI Curves (N1, N2, N3, N4)



17) Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

Figure 7-28. Non Standard Curves (A, B, C, D, E)

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

ED

C

B

A

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : A, B, C, D, ECURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




18) Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)

Figure 7-29. Non Standard Curves (K, L, M, N)



19) Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

Figure 7-30. Non Standard Curves (P, R, T, V)

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.09

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

T

R

V

P

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : P, R, T, VCURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

TIM

E(S

EC

ON

DS

)




20) Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

Figure 7-31. Non Standard Curves (W, Y, Z)

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.09

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

Y

W

Z

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : W, Y, ZCURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ± 5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

TIM

E(S

ECO

ND

S)




21) Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Figure 7-32. Non Standard Curves (1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

5

4

2

3

1

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




22) Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

Figure 7-33. Non Standard Curves (6, 7, 8, 8*, 9)

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.09

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

9

7

8

8*6

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : 6, 7, 8, 8*, 9CURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

TIM

E(S

ECO

ND

S)




23) Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)

Figure 7-34. Non Standard Curves (11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)



24) Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)

Figure 7-35. Non Standard Curves (F, H, J, KG)

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900 1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.9

1

2

3

4

5

6789

10

20

30

40

50

60708090

100

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1k 2k 3k 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k

0.01

0.02

0.03

0.04

0.05

0.060.070.080.090.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.60.70.80.91

2

3

4

5

678910

20

30

40

50

60708090100

FKG

J

H

RECLOSER CLEARING TIME CURVE : F, H, J, KGCURVES ARE AVERAGE CLEARING TIMEVARIATIONS ±5% OR 0.01 SECONDS

TIM

E(SE

CO

ND

S)




7.1.19. Live Load Block It is to block reloser closing if the load side is live line.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LOAD BLOCK / Function

Range OFF, REC, CLOSE, BOTH

Default OFF Step ~

Select whether to use Live load block function.

OFF : Live load block function does not work. REC : When recloser closing by auto reclosing function, this function works.

CLOSE : When local or remote closing, the function works. BOTH :When recloser closing regardless of auto reclosing or remote/local closing, the function works.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LOAD BLOCK / Live Level

Range 0.10 ~ 0.90 pu


Set pickup level of live line

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LOAD BLOCK / Detect Time



Set a time to detect live line in load side. The live line is determined if load side voltage is more than pickup level for this set time.

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING]>Live Level: 0.80>Detect Time: 5[0~60000:5ms]

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING]>Funcktion: OFF>Live Level: 0.80[0.10~0.90:0.01pu]

[LIVE LOAD BLOCKING]>Funcktion: OFF>Live Level: 0.80[OFF/REC/CLOSE/BOTH]



7.1.20. Hotline Tag When “HOT LINE TAG” LEN is ON in the front panel, the over current protection function is operated with the setting value of this menu. Also, Lockout with 1 time trip even the reclosing function is activated. The Hot Line Tag function is composed of phase, gound, sensitive ground, and negative sequence overcurrent elements. The setting items of each element are same with the over current protection element. Refer to “PHASE FAST”, “GROUND FAST”, “SEF ELEMENT” and “NEG SEQ FAST” menu.

7.1.21. Live Line ETR300 has Line line detect element. If one phase voltage among three phase maintais over live detec level during a constant time, live line is detected. Live line detection setting item is same as below.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Lv

Range 0.10 ~ 0.90 pu


Set the live line level and this is set in multiple of previous rating.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LIVE LINE / Live Line Tm

Range 0.0 ~18 0.0sec


Set the delay time of live detec element.

[LIVE LINE] >Live Line Lv: 0.30 >Live Line Tm: 4.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]

[LIVE LINE] >Live Line Lv: 0.30 >Live Line Tm: 4.0 [0.10~0.90:0.01pu]



7.1.22. Demand Current ETR300 has Demand detect element.When Demand currnet over the detect level is maintained a constant time during the detect element activation, this element is detected. The detect level and delay time can be set individually per phase, ground and negative sequence element. Demand detect setting items are same as following.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ Function


Default TRIP Step ~


If function = AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a AR condition, the device gives the alarm.

If function = Trip & AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ Interval

Range 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min

Default 5 min Step ~

Set the time interval to calculate the Demand current.. When current of constant size flows, it is the time that the Demand current reachs the 90% of present current size.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ PHA Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default 600 Step 1A

Set the Pickup current of phase Demand element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ PHA Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Set the detect delay time of phase Demand element.

[DEMAND] >PHA Pickup: 600>PHA T Delay: 10.00[0.00~600.00:0.01s]

[DEMAND] >PHA Pickup: 600>PHA T Delay: 10.00[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

[DEMAND] >Function: OFF>Interval: 5[5/10/15/20/30/60m]

[DEMAND] >Function: OFF>Interval: 5[OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ GND Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default 300 Step 1A

Set the Pickup current of ground Demand element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ GND Time Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Set the detect delay time of ground Demand element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ NEQ Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default 600 Step 1A

Set the Pickup current of negative phase sequence Demand element.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / DEMAND/ NEQTime Delay

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Set the detect delay time of negative phase sequence Demand element.

[DEMAND] >NEQ Pickup: 600 >NEQ T Delay: 10.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

[DEMAND] >NEQ Pickup: 600 >NEQ T Delay: 10.00 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

[DEMAND] >GND Pickup: 300 >GND T Delay: 10.00 [0.00~600.00:0.01s]

[DEMAND] >GND Pickup: 300 >GND T Delay: 10.00 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]



7.1.23. Other Element 7.1.23.1. Sequence Coordination

When several Reclosers are connected in series to protect distribution systems, ETR300-R contains Sequence Coordination feature which can prevent the simultaneous trip operations in both of Back-up and Down-line Reclosers due to phase/ground fault. Sequence Coordination feature is activated only if one out of several Down-line Reclosers connected to one Back-up Recloser detects a fault current. The following rules should be kept to activate Sequence Coordination feature. 1) The same characteristics of fast and delay operations in the total number of the trip operations

and identical basic Time Current Curves should be set for all Reclosers connected in series. 2) The identical reclose interval time should be set for all Reclosers in series. 3) To coordinate the protection characteristics, an additional delay operation time (at least 100 ms)

should be applied to the Time Current Curve characteristics of Back-up Recloser, not to those of Down-line Reclosers.

4) The reset time of Back-up Recloser should be set longer than any reclose interval time of all Down-line Reclosers. This setting will prevent the reset operation of Back-up Recloser during the reclose operation of Down-lines.

The Sequence Coordination feature should be enabled to the following settings.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / Seq' Coordi'

Range OFF, ON

Default OFF Step ~

Sequence coordination offers the function of preventing unnecessary operation of the backup recloser when two more reclosers are connected in series.


[ OTHER ELEMENT ] >Seq’ Coordi’: OFF L.O Priority: GND[OFF/ON]



As shown in “Figure 7-36. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram”, if Sequence Coordination feature at Back-up Recloser is enabled and a phase/ground fault occurs in distribution systems, the Back-up Recloser operates timing counter by overcurrent elements. During the count at the Back-up Recloser, if the distribution system is restored to normal by TRIP with Down-line Recloser , the number of the trip operations of Back-up Recloser is increased one step. Back-up Recloser performs trip operation instead of activating Sequence Coordination feature at the last sequence of the full sequence. If Auto Reclose switch is set to one TRIP, Sequence Coordination function can not be operated.

EVR 1

EVR 2

Faulted

Back Up

Down lineClose

Open

Close

Open

Time

Starting Reset Time

Counter

Increase Trip Counter without Trip

Lockout Status

Figure 7-36. Sequence Coordination Operation Block Diagram



7.1.23.2. Others

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / L.O Priority

Range PHA, GND

Default GND Step ~

Lockout priority

PHA : Phase prior GND : Ground prior

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / F/I Reset

Range AUTO, MANUAL

Default AUTO Step ~

Faulted Indicator reset method

AUTO : Reset shall be performed by pressing [FI RESET] button or shall be performed automatically after High Voltage line becomes normal.

MANUAL : It shall be reset by pressing [FI RESET] button.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / OTHER ELEMENT / D/T M-Close

Range 0.00 ~ 600.00 sec


Time delay for manual close

[OTHER ELEMENT] F/I Reset: AUTO>D/T M-Close: 0.00[0.00~600.00:0.01]

[OTHER ELEMENT] L.O Priority: PHA>F/I Reset: AUTO[AUTO/MANUAL]

[OTHER ELEMENT] Seq’ Coordi’: OFF>L.O Priority: PHA[PHA/GND]



7.1.24. Phase Open/Loss This function determine Phase open/loss in case that one or two phases voltages are more than Off Level and, determine normal in case that all three phases voltages are higher than On Level, the function is released. Under normal condition and does not indicate Phase open/loss. The setting items of Phase Open/Loss detec element are same as below.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ON/OFF LEVEL / On Level

Range 0.70 ~ 0.85 pu


Set normal voltage level. This setting is applied with the multiple of rated voltage.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ON/OFF LEVEL / Off Level

Range 0.30 ~ 0.75 pu


Set phase open/loss level. This setting is applied with the multiple of rated voltage.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ON/OFF LEVEL / Time

Range 0.0 ~ 180.0sec


Set delay time of phase open/loss.

[ON/OFF LEVEL] >Off Level: 0.50 >Time : 4.0 [0.1~180.0:0.1s]

[ON/OFF LEVEL] >On Level: 0.80 >Off Level: 0.50 [0.30~0.75:0.01pu]

[ON/OFF LEVEL] >On Level: 0.80 >Off Level: 0.50 [0.70~0.85:0.01pu]



7.1.25. Alarm Current ETR300 occures an Alarm Current event when over the detect level of RMS current maintains a constant time. Alarm Current event is occurred individually per A, B, C, N phase and Negative Sequence. Alarm Current setting items are same as below.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / PHA-Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A

Default Applicable for lower than Ver. 3.4 of ETR300-R : 400

Applicable for Ver. 3.4 or higher of ETR300-R : OFF

Step 1A

Set the detect current of Alarm Current about phase current.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / PHA-Time

Range 0.0 ~ 180.0 sec


Set the detect time of alarm Current about the phase current.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / GND-Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A



Step 1A

Set the detect current of Alarm Current about ground current.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / GND-Time

Range 0.0 ~ 180.0 sec


Set the detect time of Alarm Current about ground current.

[OVER CURRENT] >GND-Pickup: 70>GND-Time: 2.0[0.0~180.0:0.1s]

[OVER CURRENT] >GND-Pickup: 70>GND-Time: 2.0[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]

[OVER CURRENT] >PHA-Pickup: 400>PHA-Time: 2.0[0.0~180.0:0.1s]

[OVER CURRENT] >PHA-Pickup: 400>PHA-Time: 2.0[0(OFF),10~1600:1A]



PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / NEG-Pickup

Range 0(OFF), 10 ~ 1600A



Step 1A

Set the detect current of Alarm Current about the negative seq’ current.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / ALARM CURRENT / NEG -Time

Range 0.0 ~ 180.0 sec


Set the detect time of alarm Current about the negative seq’ current.

[OVER CURRENT] >NEG-Pickup: 400 >NEG -Time: 2.0 [0.0~180.0:0.1s]

[OVER CURRENT] >NEG-Pickup: 400 >NEG-Time: 2.0 [0(OFF),10~1600:1A]



7.1.26. Loss of Phase ETR300-R has a loss of phase element. The element is provided for trip, alarm and control when loss of phase is occurred. Loss of Phase can be turned on and off by Primary and Alternate settings and is an optional element depending on the specification of ETR300-R. If any phase voltage of source side becomes 110% higher than Loss of Phase level and one or two phases voltage keeps lower than Loss of Phase for a certain period, circuit breaker determines Loss of Phase. The loss of phase element in the following four settings should be enabled for loss of phase.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LOSS OF PHASE / Function


Default OFF Step ~


If function = AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a AR condition, the device gives the alarm.

If function = Trip & AL, the feature is operational. When the feature asserts a TRIP & AR condition, the device trips and gives the alarm.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LOSS OF PHASE / Pickup

Range 0.00 ~ 1.25 xVT



required whenever the voltage goes below 70V, enter(30/100) = 0.30 × VT for the pickup.

PRIMARY, ALTERNATE or EITBANK SETTING / LOSS OF PHASE / Time Delay

Range 0.10 ~ 100.00 sec


The time set-up is to delay time for loss of phase trip(or alarm).

[LOSS OF PHASE ] Pickup: 0.30>Time Delay: 20.00[0.10~100.00:0.01s]

[ LOSS OF PHASE ] >Function: OFF>Pickup: 0.30[0.00~1.25:0.1pu]

[ LOSS OF PHASE ] >Function: OFF Pickup: 0.30[OFF/TR/AL/TR&AL]



7.2. Select Setbank

ETR300 has 6 Setbank and it can have 6 different settings. Primary setting is default setting which works with forwarding Power flow. Alternate settings is used if it requires of small changes in Primary settings or backward power flow, or because of the user’s needs. Edit setting is used for quick and convenient setting change.

GROUP SETTING / SELECT SETBNAK / PRIMARY

Range BANK1 ~ 6

Default BANK1 Step ~

Select a Bank of Primary setting group.

GROUP SETTING / SELECT SETBNAK / ALTERNATE

Range BANK1 ~ 6

Default BANK2 Default ~

Select a bank of Alternate setting group.

GROUP SETTING / SELECT SETBNAK / EDIT

Range BANK1 ~ 6

Default BANK3 Default ~

Select a bank of Edit.

[SELECT SETBANK] >Alternate: BANK2 >Edit: BANK3 [BANK1 ~ BANK6]

[SELECT SETBANK] >Primary: BANK1 >Alternate: BANK2 [BANK1 ~ BANK6]

[SELECT SETBANK] >Primary: BANK1 Alternate: BANK2 [BANK1 ~ BANK6]



8. EVENT RECORDER Place the curser on “3.EVENT”, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. ETR300-R records all events during the operation, occurred events are recorded separately such as operation event, fault event, system event, set change event, load event and diagnostic event. All events are recorded in order(FIFO). In this menu, all events can be checked and deleted. Also, all events can be checked in interface program. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.

8.1. Operation Event

Operation event records max. 256 events. When Recloser operates(OPEN/CLOSE), operation status and control signal(LOCAL/REMOTE) is recorded in operation event. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / OPERATION” to confirm operation events.

[][] are used to check event. [1/256] is the latest event record.

[EVENT] >1.OPERATION 2.FAULT 3.FAULT CYCLE 4.SYSTEM 5.SET CHANGE 6.AVER.LOAD/MIN 7.PEAK.LOAD/HOUR 8.PEAK.LOAD/DAY 9.DIGNOSTIC 10.PQM 11.ALARM CURRENT 12.CLEAR SAVED DATA



Trigger Source

STATUS

- CLOSE - OPEN - EARTH CLOSE (ECLOSE) - EARTH OPEN (EOPEN)

CONTROL

- MANUAL: Load break switch mechanical manual operation. - LOCAL: Operation at local - REMOTE: Remote operation.

Trigger Time

Monitor changes of Trigger source status in every 5 msec.

Trigger Capacity

Stores last 256 events.

8.2. Fault Event

Fault event records max 256 events. Fault event records fault occurred time, fault phase, fault current size and each phase fault records can be checked. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT” to confirm fault events.



[][] buttons are used to check fault events. Press [ENT] button in fault event screen to check fault current value. And press [ENT] again to return to previous screen. [1/256] is the latest event record.

Fault Event Information(EV)

Information before a fault occurring, is recorded. If control type is SWTYPE and coordinating with other protection circuit breaker such as recloser, reclosing sequence is recorded.

SEQUENCE Sequence operation is recoded from one [FAULT].

TARGET Records the fault detect phase and fault direction.

001/256 Shows the latest event in order and records 256 events.

FAULT CURRENT

Max. current value is indicated when fault is occurred. Fault detect phase and fault current direction is indicated.

- F: Forward Fault or None Direction Fault detect - R: Reverse Fault detect

Total Information(TO)

Fault type on each phase(Permanent/Instantaneous), time and max current are recorded.

SEQUENCE Record the fault detect phase and fault type.( P: Permanent fault, T: Temporary fault)

001/256 Shows the latest event in order and max.256 events are corded.

FAULT CURRENT

Indicates the max. current value and fault detect fault type when fault is occurred.

Trigger Source

Taget Element

- A: A phase - B: B phase - C: C phase - N: N phase - S: SEF - Q : NEQ

Fault detect element

- T: TEMPORARY - P: PERMANENT



Detect direction

- F: FORWARD - R: REVERSE - Fault Current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, N phase, SEF

Trigger Time

Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger Capacity


8.3. Fault Cycle - Summary

Fault wave is recorded up to 32 fault waves. Fault wave information is displayed on LCD. Captured waveform can be checked in interface software. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / FAULT CYCLE” to confirm fault cycle summary.

[][] is used to check the fault event. [01/32] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

Fault wave captured time.

- PU: Pick up time. - TR: Trip time. - PU&TR: Picku up & Trip time

Fault current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, N phase Fault Location [km]

*. Indicated when “Fault Locater” function is ON. *. For more details about settings of “Fault Locater” function, refer to “6.4.7. Fault Locator”.



Trigger Time

Moniters changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle. Trigger Capacity

Maximum 32 events are recorded. Recoder Cycle Length

20 cycles when 128 sampling 40 cycles when 64 sampling 80 cycles when 32 sampling 160 cycles when 16 sampling

8.4. System Event

Maximum 2048 events are recorded. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SYSTEM” to confirm system events.

[][] button is used to check the records. [0001/2048] is the latest event record. Trigger Source

Protection Element 52A Contact Sequence status Front panel control AC supply External control Fail operation External input status System alarm Sleep Mode Gas Status



※. NOTE : Refer to “Appendix B. LOGIC BIT Attributes & Description” for more details

about trigger source.

Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger type

Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

Storage Capacity


8.5. Set Change Event

Maximum 100 Set change Event can be recorded. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / SET CHANGE” to confirm set change events.

[][] button is used to check the records. [001/100] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

Changed set menu

- GLOBAL SETTING - PRIMARY SETTING - ALTERNATE SETTING - EDITBANK SETTING

Change method

- LOCAL: Set change at local - REMOTE: Sec change in remote - PROGRAM: Set change by Interface software.



Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 5msec. Storage Capacity


8.6. Aver. Load/Min

Average load value is recorded every 15 minutes. Maximum 6144 values, it’s about 64 days events can be recorded. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / AVER. LOAD/MIN” to confirm aver. load/min events.

[0003/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 000002008/10/01 00:00

[0002/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 000002008/10/01 00:00

[0001/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 000002008/10/01 00:00

P3: 00000/ 00000PA: 00000/ 00000PB: 00000/ 00000PC: 00000/ 00000

P3: 00000/ 00000PA: 00000/ 00000PB: 00000/ 00000PC: 00000/ 00000

P3: 00000/ 00000PA: 00000/ 00000PB: 00000/ 00000PC: 00000/ 00000

ENT ENT ENT

[][] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press [ENT] button. To return back to previous screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/6144] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

Measured current [A]: A phase, B phase, C phase, N phase Measured active power [kW]: 3 phases, A phase, B phase, C phase Measured reactive power [kVar]: 3phases, A phase, B phase, C phase

Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 15min.

Storage Capacity




8.7. Peak. Load/Hour

Peak load event is recorded in every hour. Maximum load in every hour, is recorded up to 6144 events, it’s about 256 days events are recorded. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PEAK. LOAD/HOUR” to confirm peak. load/hour events.

[0003/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 000002008/10/01/01

[0002/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 000002008/10/01/02

[0001/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 000002008/10/01/03

P3: 00000/ 00000PA: 00000/ 00000PB: 00000/ 00000PC: 00000/ 00000

P3: 00000/ 00000PA: 00000/ 00000PB: 00000/ 00000PC: 00000/ 00000

P3: 00000/ 00000PA: 00000/ 00000PB: 00000/ 00000PC: 00000/ 00000

ENT ENT ENT

[][] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press [ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/6144] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source


Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1hour.

Storage Capacity




8.8. Peak. Load/Day

Peak load event is recorded in every day. Maximum load in every day, is recorded up to 6144 events, it’s 6144 days events are recorded. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PEAK. LOAD/DAY” to confirm peak. load/day events.

[0003/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 000002008/10/01

[0002/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 000002008/10/02

[0001/6144] A: 00000 B: 00000 C: 00000 N: 000002008/10/03

P3: 00000/ 00000PA: 00000/ 00000PB: 00000/ 00000PC: 00000/ 00000

P3: 00000/ 00000PA: 00000/ 00000PB: 00000/ 00000PC: 00000/ 00000

P3: 00000/ 00000PA: 00000/ 00000PB: 00000/ 00000PC: 00000/ 00000

ENT ENT ENT

[][] button is used to check the events. To check real active power and reactive power, press [ENT] button in Current display screen. To return back to current display screen, press [ENT] again. [0001/6144] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source


Trigger Time

Monitors changes of Trigger source status in every 1 day.

Storage Capacity




8.9. Diagnostic Event

Diagnostic event is recorded, maximum 512 events. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / DIGNOSTIC” to confirm diagnosticevents.

[][] button is used to check the events. [001/512] is the latest event record.

Trigger Source

DSP Fail ADC Fail RTC Fail Memory Fail Flash-Rom Fail Circuit voltage Fail Globlal Setting Fail Primary Setting Fail Alternate Setting Fail Event Fail Count Fail DO Fail Close Fail Open Fail

※. NOTE : Refer to “Appendix B. LOGIC BIT Attributes & Description” for more details

about trigger source.

Trigger Time

Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.



Trigger type

Stores type of Trigger source : Pickup(assert) or Dropout(deassert)

Storage Capacity

Stores last 512 events. When Diagnostis Fail is occurred the treatment method is same as following.

Table 8-1. Treatment Method when Diagnostis Fail is Occurred

No. Item Period Method 1 DSP Within 200msec Change to fault detect block 2 ADC 1/4 cycle Change to fault detect block 3 RTC 1 hour, at booting Change the date to January 1st, 19704 Memory 1 hour, at booting Restart

5 Flash-Rom At Flash-Rom reading and writing, at booting Restart

6 Circuit voltage 1/4 cycle Change to fault detect block

7 Global setting At setting change, at booting Change the Global setting value to Default value

8 Primary setting At setting change, at booting Change the Primary setting value to Default value

9 Alternate setting At setting change, at booting Change the Alternate setting valueDefault value

10 Event At event save and reading Event initialization 11 Count At counter writing and reading Counter initialization 12 DO signal 50msec Output power block 13 Close/Open At closing and opening Necessary to check in local

8.10. PQM

Power Quality Management(PQM) detect event is recorded up to 512 events. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / PQM” to confirm peak. PQM events.

[][] button is used to check the event. [001/512] is the latest event record.



Trigger Source

PQM detect element.

- Sag(SAG): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Long Time(LONG)

- Swell(SWL): Instantaneous(INST), Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Long Time(LONG)

- Interruption(INT): Momentary(MOME), Temporary(TEMP), Sustained(LONG) - Voltage Harmonic distortion(VTH) - Current Harmonic distortion(ITH) - Source side Unbalance Voltage(UBV) - Load side Unbalance Voltage(UBL) - Current Unbalance(UBI) - Source side Over Voltage(OVS) - Load side Over Voltage(OVL) - Source side Under Voltage(UVS) - Load side Under Voltage(UVL) - Under Frequency(UNF)

PQM detected phase : A phase, B phase, C phase PQM element related measured value. PQM detect time(cycle)

Trigger Time

Monitors status of Trigger source in every 5msec.

Storage Capacity




8.11. Alarm Current Event

Alarm current event is occurred by “MAIN MENU/ GROUP SETTING/ PRIMARY or ALTERNATE SETTING/ ALARM CURRENT” menu. Max. 512 events of alarm current event can be recorded and indicated. Move to “MAIN MENU / EVENT / ALARM CURRENT” menu to check the alarm current event.

[][] is used to check the event. [001/512] is the latest recorded event.

Trigger Source

Taget element

- A: Phase A Alarm current - B: Phase B Alarm current - C: Phase C Alarm current - N: Phase N Alarm current

Current of correspondent phase in case of alarm current event is occurred

Trigger Time

Check the status change of trigger source every 1/4 cycle.

Trigger type

Record the Alarm current event occurrence (HI/ASSERT) or extinction (LO/DEASSERT).

Trigger Capacity

Max. 512 events are saved.



8.12. Clear Saved Data

Move to “EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA” to clear saved data.

EVENT / CLEAR SAVED DATA

Clear Saved Data Select an item to delete and press [ENT] button. If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS” message is displayed.

11. ABOVE ALL 1 ~ 10 items are all deleted.

[EVENT CLEAR] EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS

[CLEAR SAVED DATA] >1.OPERATION 2.FAULT 3.FAULT WAVE 4.SYSTEM 5.SET CHANGE 6.LOAD PROFILE 7.DIGNOSTIC 8.PQM 9.PQM WAVE 10.ALARM CURRENT

11.ABOVE ALL



9. MAINTENANCE Place the curser on “MAINTENANCE” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move into this menu. This menu displays Maintenance information. This menu has sub-menu as below and by pressing [ENT] button, move into sub-menu.

9.1. Count

Counter information is displayed, it has sub-menus as below.

9.1.1. CCU Count Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU” to confirm CCU(ETR300-R) count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / CCU

Restart Count ETR300-R restart number is displayed.

Diagnostic Count ETR300-R Diagnostic Count is displayed.

[CCU] RESTART : 30 DIAGNOSTIC : 0

[COUNT] >1.CCU 2.OPERATION 3.FAULT 4.PQM 5.COMMUNICATION

[MAINTENANCE] >1.COUNT 2.INTERRUT TIME 3.CONTACT WEAR 4.DATA RESET 5.CCU INFO



9.1.2. Operation Count Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / OPERATION” to confirm operation count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / OPERATION

Recloser operation counter is displayed.

9.1.3. Fault Count Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT

[FAULT] 1/3 F.I TOTAL: 0

TRIP: 0 H/C-LOCKOUT: 0

[FAULT] 2/3 TOT: 0 SEF: 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0 N : 0

[FAULT] 3/3 TOT: 0 SEF: 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0 N : 0

Number of fault is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 3 pages. Use [][] button to move into sub-menu.

FAULT(1/3) Total number of fault is displayed. Number of TRIP and number of Lockout are displayed.

FAULT-P(2/3) Total number of PERMANENT fault and number of fault per phase are displayed.

FAULT-T(3/3) Total number of TEMPORARY fault and number of fault per phase are displayed.

[OPERATION] COUNT : 0



9.1.4. PQM Count This menu displays PQM related counter information, it has sub-menu as below.

9.1.4.1. INTERRUPT

Move to “MAINTENANCE / PQM / INTERRUPT” to confirm interrup count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / INTERRUPT

[INTERRUPT] 1/2 TOTAL: 0

A : 0 B : 0 C : 0

[INTERRUPT] 2/2 MOMENTARY : 0 TEMPORARY : 0SUSTAINED : 0

Number of Interruption is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] button to move into sub-menu.

INTERRUPT(1/2) Total number of Interruption and total number of interruption per phase are displayed.

INTERRUPT(2/2) Number of fault per type is displayed on Interruption.

9.1.4.2. Sag

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG” to confirm sag count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SAG

[SAG] 1/2 TOTAL: 0

A : 0 B : 0 C : 0

Number of Sag is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] buttons to move into sub-menu.

SAG(1/2) Total number of Sag occurred and total number of Sag per phase are displayed.

SAG(2/2) Number of Sag per type is displayed.

[PQM COUNT] >1.INTERRUT 2.SAG 3.SWELL 4.HARMONICS 5.CURR UNBALANCE 6.VOLT UNBALANCE 7.UNDER VOLTAGE 8.OVER VOLTAGE 9.UNDER FREQUNCY



9.1.4.3. Swell

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL” to confirm swell count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / SWELL

Number of Swell occurred is displayed. This COUNT menu consists of 2 pages and use [][] button to move into sub-menu.

SWELL(1/2) Total number of Swell and number of Swell per phase are displayed.

SWELL(2/2) Number of Swell per type is displayed.

9.1.4.4. Harmonics

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC” to confirm sag count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / HARMONIC

[VTHD] 1/2 TOTAL: 0

A : 0 B : 0 C : 0

[ITHD] 2/2 TOTAL: 0 A : 0 B : 0 C : 0

Number of Harmonic distortion is displayed. The COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] buttons to move into sub-menu.

VTHD(1/2) Total number of Voltage Harmonic distortion and number of voltage harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.

ITHD(2/2) Total number of current harmonic distortion and number of current harmonic distortion per phase are displayed.

9.1.4.5. Current Unbalance

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE” to confirm current unbalance count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / CURRENT UNBALANCE

Number of Current Unbalance occurred is displayed. [CURRENT UNBALANCE] COUNT : 0



9.1.4.6. Voltage Unbalance

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / VOLTAGE UNBALANCE” to confirm voltage unbalance count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / VOLTAGE UNBALANCE

Number of voltage unbalance occurred is displayed.

SOURSE SIDE Number of voltage unbalance at source side is displayed.

LOAD SIDE Number of voltage unbalance at load side is displayed.

9.1.4.7. Under Voltage

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE” to confirm under voltage count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER VOLTAGE

[VS-UNDER VOLT] 1/2dddddddTOTAL : 0A : 0 B : 0C : 0

[VL-UNDER VOLT] 2/2dddddddTOTAL : 0A : 0 B : 0C : 0

Number of under-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] button to move into sub-menu.

VS-UNDER VOLT(1/2) Total number of undervoltage at source side and number of undervoltage per phase are displayed.

VL-UNDER VOLT (2/2) Total number of undervoltage at load side and number of undervoltage at load side per phase are displayed.

[VOLTAGE UNBALANCE] SOURCE SIDE : 0 LOAD SIDE : 0



9.1.4.8. Over Voltage

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE” to confirm over voltage count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / OVER VOLTAGE

[VL-OVER VOLT] 2/2dddddddTOTAL : 0A : 0 B : 0C : 0

[VS-OVER VOLT] 1/2dddddddTOTAL : 0A : 0 B : 0C : 0

Number of over-voltage is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] button to move into sub-menu.

VS-OVER VOLT(1/2) Total number of overvoltage at source side and number of undervoltage per phase are displayed.

VL-OVER VOLT (2/2) Total number of overvoltage at load side and number of overvoltage at load side per phase are displayed.

9.1.4.9. Under Frequency

Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / Under Frequency” to confirm under frequency count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / PQM / UNDER FRQUENCY

Number of underfrequency is displayed.

[UNDER FREQUENCY] COUNT : 0



9.1.5. Communication Count Move to “MAINTENANCE / COUNT / FAULT” to confirm fault count.

MAINTENANCE / COUNT / COMMUNICATION

[COMM-S1] 1/6Rx Message: 0Tx Message: 0Unsol Tx : 0

[COMM-S1] 2/6Rx CRC Err: 0Tx RETRY : 0SBO TO : 0

[COMM-S1] 3/6D Conf TO : 0A Conf TO : 0

[COMM-S2] 4/6Rx Message: 0Tx Message: 0Unsol Tx : 0

[COMM-S2] 5/6Rx CRC Err: 0Tx RETRY : 0SBO TO : 0

[COMM-S3] 6/6D Conf TO : 0A Conf TO : 0

Indicates the counter information of DNP3.0 protocol. This COUNT menu consists 6 pages. Use [][] button to move into sub-menu.

COMM-S1(1/6) Rx Message: Indicates the total number of received message of

DNP3.0 Slave1.

Tx Message: Indicates the total number of transferred message of DNP3.0 Slave1.

Unsol Tx: Indicates the total number of transferred Unsol message of DNP3.0 Slave 1.

COMM-S1(2/6) Rx CRC Err: Indicates the total number of CRC error message of

DNP3.0 Slave 1.

Tx Message: Indicates the total number of resend messange of DNP3.0 Slave1.

SBO TO: Indicates the SBO Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave 1.

COMM-S1(3/6) D Conf TO: Indicates the Data Link confirm Time-out number of

DNP3.0 Slave1.

A Conf TO: Indicates the Application Link Confirm Time-out number of DNP3.0 Slave1.

COMM-S2(4~6/6) Indicates the communication counter of DNP3.0 Slave2. The composition counter is same as DNP3.0 Slave 1.



9.2. Interrupt Time

Move to “MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME” to confirm interrupt time.

MAINTENANCE / INTERRUPT TIME

[INTERRUP TIME] 1/2 TOTAL: 0

A : 0 B : 0 C : 0 N : 0

[INTERRUP TIME] 2/2 MOMENTARY : 0 TEMPORARY : 0 SUSTAINED : 0

Accumulated interrupt time is displayed. This COUNT menu consists 2 pages and use [][] button to move into sub-menu.

INTERRUPT TIME(1/2) Total accumulated time and accumulated time per phase are displayed. Time unit is Cycle.

INTERRUPT TIME(2/2) Accumulated time per interrupt type is displayed, time unit is cycle.

9.3. Contact Wear

Move to “MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR” to confirm contact wear.

MAINTENANCE / CONTACT WEAR

Displayes recloser contact wear in percentage.

[CONTACT WEAR-%] A : 100.00 B : 100.00 C : 100.00



9.4. DATA RESET

Move to “MAINTENANCE / DATA RESET”. This menu resets COUNT and Maintenance data.

MAINTENACE / DATA RESET

Saved data reset Select an item to delete and press[ENT] button. If deleting is completed, “EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS” message is displayed.

*. NOTE : 1) ‘OPERATION COUNT’ is reset by a set value in ‘MAIN MENU/

GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ OPERATION COUNT’. 2) ‘CONTACT WEAR’ is reset by a set value in ‘MAIN MENU/

GLOBLA SETTING/ MONITERING/ CONTACT WEAR’. 3) Except ‘OPERATION COUNT’ and ‘CONTACT WEAR, all data

is reset for 0.

11. ABOVE ALL 1 ~ 10 item data are all reset.

9.5. CCU Information

Move to “MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO” to confirm ccu information.

MAINTENANCE / CCU INFO

Present ETR300-R information is displayed. CCU information screen consists of 2 screen, first screen shows firmware option, second screen shows firmware version. Screen is changed by [UP] [DOWN] key.

MPU Ver: 1.5 DSP Ver: 3.10 CPU Ver: 1.01

TYPE:ETR300-R03 01:00000001 0000000402:7d090161 02873f1f03:0000b7ff

[EVENT CLEAR] EVENT CLEAR SUCCESS

[DATA RESET] >1.CCU COUNT 2.OPERATION COUNT 3.FAULT COUNT 4.PQM COUNT 5.COM’ COUNT 6.COUNT ALL 7.INTERRUPT TIME 8.CONTACT WEAR 9.ENERGY 10.MAX DEMAND 11.PEAK CURRENT 12.COMM BUFF 13.ABOVE ALL



10. TIME Place the curser on “TIME” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu.

TIME

Set present date and time. 1) Press [ENT] button to select and change a setting. 2) To change a number, use [][] button and to move next item,

press [ENT] button. 3) To save all changed setting, press [ENT].

[SAVE TIME] 2006/11/06 15;01:50 PRESS <ENT> TO SAVE

[SETTING TIME] 2006/11/05 21:02:38 USE [UP/DOWN/ENTER] PRESS <FUNC> : ABORT

[CURRENT TIME] 2006/11/05 21:02:38 PRESS <ENT> TO SET



11. STATUS Place the curser on “STATUS” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.

11.1. Recloser

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / RECLOSER”

STATUS/ RECLOSER

Present recloser and ETR300-R status are displayed. Use [] [] button to check all items.

RECLOSER Displays Circuit Breaker status. OPEN, CLOSE, TROUBLE(Device in Trouble status)

PANEL LOCK Displays panel lock status. LOCK, UNLOCK CONTROL Operation control select is displayed. REMOTE, LOCAL, TROUBLE(Device in Trouble status) RECLOSE Display whether to use reclosing function. DISABLE, ENABLE PHA-PROTECT Phase protection function status is displayed. DISABLE, ENABLE

[RECLOSER] >RECLOSER :TROUBLE>PANEL LOCK : UNLOCK>CONTROL : LOCAL>RECLOSE :DISABLE>PHA-PROTECT:DISABLE>GND-PROTECT:DISABLE>LOCKOUT :LOCKOUT>POWER : ON>BATTERY : NORMAL>BAT’CHRGER : NORMAL>DOOR : CLOSE>DNP ADDRESS: 1>MASTER ADDR: 65534>HANDLE LOCK: OCKOUT>GAS : NORMAL

[STATUS] >1.RECLOSER 2.INPUT PORTS 3.OUTPUT PORTS



STATUS/ RECLOSER

GND-PROTECT Ground protection function status is displayed. DISABLE, ENABLE LOCKOUT Section operation status is displayed. RESET, RUNNING, LOCKOUT POWER External power supply status is displayed. ON, OFF BATTERY Battery status is displayed. NORMAL, FAIL BAT’ CHARGER Battery charger status is displayed. NORMAL, FAIL DOOR Door status is displayed. OPEN, CLOSE DNP ADDRESS ETR300-R DNP set address is displayed(0~65535). MASTER ADDR DNP Host initial address(0~65534:65535 is used for Broadcast) GAS Circuit breaker gas pressure status is displayed. NORMAL, LOW



11.2. Input Ports

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / INPUT PORTS”

STATUS/ INPUT PORTS

Displays 28 input terminal(IN101 ~ IN108, IN201 ~ IN208 and IN301 ~ IN312) status. IN301 ~ IN312 are the status of input ports in External I/O Unit ETIO10.

Depending on input signal, “HI/ASSERT” or “LO/DEASSERT” is displayed. [] [] button is used to check all input terminal status.

NOTE IN301 ~ IN312 shall be Ver 4.0 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. If the external I/O unit ETIO10 is not installed or “EX-IO?” setting is set with “NO” in “GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION” menu, “LO/DEASSERT” is displayed in “IN301 ~ IN312”.

[INPUT PORTS] IN 101 :LO/DEASSERTIN 102 :LO/DEASSERTIN 103 :LO/DEASSERTIN 104 :LO/DEASSERTIN 105 :LO/DEASSERT： IN 312 : HI/ASSERT



11.3. Output Ports

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / STATUS / OUTPUT PORTS”

STATUS/ OUTPUT PORTS

Displays 24 output terminal(OUT101 ~ OUT108, OUT201 ~ OUT208 and OUT301 ~ OUT308) status. OUT301 ~ OUT308 are the status of output ports in External I/O Unit ETIO10.

Depending on output signal, “HI/ASSERT” or “LO/DEASSERT” is displayed.

[] [] button is used to check all input terminal status.

NOTE IN301 ~ IN312 shall be Ver 4.0 or higher of ETR300-R to be indicated. If the external I/O unit ETIO10 is not installed or “EX-IO?” setting is set with “NO” in “GLOBAL SETTING / OTHERS / H/W OPTION” menu, “LO/DEASSERT” is displayed in “OUT301 ~ OUT308”.

[OUTPUT PORTS] OUT 101:LO/DEASSERT OUT 102:LO/DEASSERT OUT 103:LO/DEASSERT OUT 104:LO/DEASSERT OUT 105:LO/DEASSERT ： OUT 308: HI/ASSERT



12. METERING Place the curser on “MERING” in Main menu, press [ENT] button to move in this menu. This menu has sub-menu as below. Press [ENT] to move into sub-menu.

12.1. Metering Elements

12.1.1. Current The following values are contained in the current metering.

IA : Displays the measured phase A RMS current and phasor (A, deg°) IB : Displays the measured phase B RMS current and phasor (A, deg°) IC : Displays the measured phase C RMS current and phasor (A, deg°) IN : Displays the measured ground RMS current and phasor (A, deg°) SEF: Displays the measured sensitive earth RMS current and phasor (A, deg°) I1 : Indicates the measured normal voltage and phasor.(A, deg°) I2: Indicates the measured negative phase sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°) 3I0: Indicates the zero sequence current and phasor. (A, deg°) Peak IA : Displays the measured phase A Peak current (A) Peak IB : Displays the measured phase B Peak current (A) Peak IC : Displays the measured phase C Peak current (A) Peak IN : Displays the measured ground Peak current (A) Peak IQ : Displays the measured NEQ Peak current (A)

[METERING] >1.CURRENT 2.VOLTAGE 3.FREQUENCY 4.POWER 5.ENERGY 6.DEMAND 7.UNBALANCE 8.HARMONICS 9.TRUE R.M.S 10.TD 11.CCU SEF



You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT”

MAIN MENU / METERING / CURRENT

Current per phase and angle per phase are displayed.

Use [] [] keys to move to next value.

[CURRENT]IA: 0A ∠ 0°IB: 0.00A ∠ 0°IC: 0.00A ∠ 0°

[CURRENT]IN: 0A ∠ 0°

SEF: 0.00A ∠ 0°

[SEQUENCE ‘I’]I1: 0A ∠ 0°I2: 0.00A ∠ 0°

3I0: 0.00A ∠ 0°

[PEAK ‘I’]IA: 0A IB: 0AIC: 0A IN: 0AIQ: 0A

12.1.2. Voltage The following values are contained in the voltage metering.

VS-PN: Voltage per phase and angle per phase at source side, are displayed(, deg°). VS-PP: Phase to phase voltage and angle at source side, are displayed(, deg°). VS-SEQ: Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence voltage and angle at source side, are displayed(,

deg°). VL-PN: Voltage per phase and angle per phase at load side, are displayed (, deg°). VL-PP: Phase to phase voltage and angle at load side, are displayed (, deg°). VL-SEQ: Forward/Reverse/Zero sequence voltage and angle at load side, are displayed (,

deg°). You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / VOLTAGE

[VS-PN]A : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°B : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°C : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°

[VS-PP]AB : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°BC : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°CA : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°

[VS-SEQ]V1 : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°V2 : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°3V0: 0.00 kV ∠ 0°

[VL-PN]A : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°B : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°C : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°

[VL-PP]AB : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°BC : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°CA : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°

[VL-SEQ]V1 : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°V2 : 0.00 kV ∠ 0°3V0: 0.00 kV ∠ 0°

Voltage and angle per phase are displayed. Use [][] button to check it.



12.1.3. Frequency The following values are contained in the frequency metering.

Source: Metering value of present source side frequency is indicated. Load : Metering value of present load side frequency is indicated.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / FREQUENCY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / FREQUENCY

Frequency Display

12.1.4. Power The following values are contained in the power metering.

POWER-KW/KVAR/KVA: Per phase, active power/ reactive power/ apparent power are displayed.

POWER FACTOR: Power factor per phase is displayed. 3PH POWER: 3phase active power, reactive power, apparent power and power factor are

indicated.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / POWER”

MAIN MENU / METERING / POWER

Per phase, power and power factor are displayed. Use [][] button to check the power metering information.

[POWER- KW/KVAR/KVA]A: 0 0 0B: 0 0 0C: 0 0 0

[POWER FACTOR]A: 0.0B: 0.0C: 0.0

[3PH POWER]KVA : 0 PF: 0.0KW : 0KVAR: 0

[FREQUENCY] Source: 0.00Hz Load : 0.00Hz



12.1.5. Energy The following values are contained in the energy metering.

POS’ W/H(10kWh): Each phase and three phase active power amount of forward direction are indicated. The indicated power is 10kWh per 1 count.

POS’ V/H(10kVar): Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of forward direction are indicated. The indicated power is 10kVar per 1 count.

NEG’ W/H(10kWh): Each phase and three phase active power amount of reverse direction are indicated. The indicated power is 10kWh per 1 count.

NEG’ V/H(10kVar): Each phase and three phase reactive power amount of reverse direction are indicated. The indicated power is 10kVar per 1 count.

You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / ENERGY”

MAIN MENU / METERING / ENERGY

[POS’ W/H(10kWh)]Pa: 0 Pb: 0Pc: 0 P3: 0S:01/01/10 00:00:00

[POS’ V/H(10kVar)]Pa: 0 Pb: 0Pc: 0 P3: 0S:01/01/10 00:00:00

[NEG’ W/H(10kWh)]Pa: 0 Pb: 0Pc: 0 P3: 0S:01/01/10 00:00:00

[NEG’ V/H(10kVar)]Pa: 0 Pb: 0Pc: 0 P3: 0S:01/01/10 00:00:00

Energy is displayed Use [][] button to check the energy metering information. The last line “S” of each page indicates the time that have started the present power amount metering. It means, it is the time that has reset in 0 the power by using the “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ ENERGY” menu.



12.1.6. Demand Current and Power ETR300-R measures and indicates the following Demand current and power items;

DEMAND CURRENT: Indicates the measured value of each phase and negative phase sequence Demand current.

PHASE A CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase A, Demand current max. value of phase A and the time that have measured the max. value.

PHASE B CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase B, Demand current max. value of phase B and the time that have measured the max. value.

PHASE C CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase C, Demand current max. value of phase C and the time that have measured the max. value.

PHASE N CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present phase N, Demand current max. value of phase N and the time that have measured the max. value.

PHASE I2 CURRENT: Indicates the Demand current of present negative phase sequence, Demand current max. value of negative phase sequence and the time that have measured the max. value.

PHASE A REAL POWER: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase A, Demand active power max. value of phase A and the time that have measured the max. value.

PHASE B REAL POWER: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase B, Demand active power max. value of phaseBA and the time that have measured the max. value.

PHASE C REAL POWER: Indicates the Demand active power of present phase C, Demand active power max. value of phase C and the time that have measured the max. value.

3P REAL POWER(kW): Indicates the Demand active value of present three-phase, Demand active power max. value of three-phase and the time that have measured the max. value.

P-A REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase A, Demand active power max. value of phase A and the time that have measured the max. value.

P-B REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase B, Demand active power max. value of phase B and the time that have measured the max. value.

P-C REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present phase C, Demand reactive power max. value of phase C and the time that have measured the max. value.

3P REACTIVE POWER: Indicates the Demand reactive power of present three-phase, Demand reactive power max. value of three-phase and the time that have measured the max. value.

※. NOTE ) The aboive Max. Demand current and power of each phase and three-phase can be reset by “MAIN MENU/ MAINTENANCE/ DATA RESET/ MAX DEMAND” menu.



You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND”

MAIN MENU / METERING / DEMAND

[DEMAND CURRENT]A: 0000 A B: 0000 AC: 0000 A N: 0000 A

NEG: 0000 A

[PHASE A CURRENT]DEMAND: 0 AMAX : 0 A

01/01/2010 00:00:00

[PHASE B CURRENT]DEMAND: 0 AMAX : 0 A

01/01/2010 00:00:00

[PHASE C CURRENT]DEMAND: 0 AMAX : 0 A

01/01/2010 00:00:00

[PHASE N CURRENT]DEMAND: 0 AMAX : 0 A

01/01/2010 00:00:00

[PHASE I2 CURRENT]DEMAND: 0 AMAX : 0 A

01/01/2010 00:00:00

[PHASE A REAL POWER]DEMAND: 0 KWMAX : 0 KW

01/01/2010 00:00:00

[3P REAL POWER (KW)]DEMAND: 0 KWMAX : 0 KW

01/01/2010 00:00:00

[P-A REACTIVE POWER]DEMAND: 0 KVarMAX : 0 KVar

01/01/2010 00:00:00

[3P REACTIVE POWER]DEMAND: 0 KVarMAX : 0 KVar

01/01/2010 00:00:00

Demand current and power is indicated. Use [][] key to check the Demand metering information.

12.1.7. Unbalance The following values are contained in the unbalance metering.

SOURCE-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at source side is displayed. LOAD-VOLT: Voltage unbalance at load side is displayed. CURRENT: Current unbalance is displayed.

You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE”

MAIN MENU / METERING / UNBALANCE

Unbalance are displayed.

[UNBALANCE- %] SOURCE-VOLT: 0.00 LOAD-VOLT: 0.00 CURRENT: 0.00



12.1.8. Harmonics You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS”

MAIN MENU / METERING / HARMONICS

[%V-Harm. A/B/C] THD : 0.0 0.0 0.0 02H : 0.0 0.0 0.0 03H : 0.0 0.0 0.0

[%V-Harm. A/B/C]04H : 0.0 0.0 0.0 05H : 0.0 0.0 0.0 06H : 0.0 0.0 0.0

[%V-Harm. A/B/C] 31H : 0.0 0.0 0.0

[%I-Harm. 31H] A : 0.0 B : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0

[%I-Harm. 02H]A : 0.0 B : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0

[%I-Harm. THD] A : 0.0 B : 0.0 C : 0.0 N : 0.0

Voltage and current harmonic rate are displayed. Use [][] button to check harmonic rate information.

12.1.9. True R.M.S You can confirm in “MAIN NEMU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S”

MAIN MENU / METERING / TRUE R.M.S

[VOLTAGE-TURE R.M.S]A : 000 V B : 000 V C : 000 V

TRUE R.M.S voltage and current per phase are displayed. Use [][] button to check TURE R.M.S. information.

12.1.10. TD Monitoring You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / TD MONITORING”

MAIN MENU / METERING / TD MONITORING

TD input value is displayed.

[TD MONITERRING] TD1: 00.0 TD2: 00.0 TD3: 00.0 TD4: 00.0 TD5: 00.0



12.1.11. CCU Reference You can confirm in “MAIN MENU / METERING / CCU REF”

MAIN MENU / METERING / CCU REF

ETR300-R reference values are displayed.

[CCU Ref] +5V: 4.9 -5V:-4.8 Temp: 37°



13. INSTALLATION 13.1. User Interface Door and Power Switch

Figure 13-1. User Interface Door and Power Switch

User Interface Door User Interface Door has two magnets upper and down(or top and bottom).To open the door, pull the handle.

Control Power Switch After opening the User Interface Door, you see 2 Switches. Left side switch is for Battery Power, right side one is for AC Power. Turning on either one of two activates control.

AC Power Outlet For user convenience, AC Power Outlet is located on User Interface Door. Fuse is installed for safety from overload. Location of fuse is referred to “Figure 13-5. Inner Structure”

TAGLOCKED

CONTROL

ENABLED

SEF

ENABLED

ENABLED

GROUND

RECLOSE

ENABLED

PROTECTION

HOT LINE

SETTINGS

ALTERNATE

ENABLED

REMOTE

ENT

ESC

FUN

CHECK

BATT'RESET

LAMP TEST

OPENCLOSE

50 HIGH CURRENT

BATTERY

RUN

DIAG/ERROR

AC SUPPLY

CLPU ON

REVERSE POWER

GROUND

SEF

C FAULT

51 FAST/DELAY

50 INSTANTANEOUS

A FAULT

B FAULT

59 OVER

L1

L2

L3

L4

27 UNDER

CHARGER

79 LOCKOUT

79 RESET

79 CYCLE

81 FREQUENCY

25 SYNCHRONISM

RX / TX

VA / VR

VB / VS

VC / VT

MANUAL LOCK

LOW PRESSURE

AWAKE

SETEVENT

METER


PORT F

TRIP

TEST

ENABLED

AUTO RESTORE

FI



13.2. Vent and Outer Cover

Figure 13-2. Air Vent and Outer Cover

Outer Cover It is for blocking the direct ray of light to delay raising temperature inside of Control Cubicle. The gap between control cubicle and cover is 10mm.

Air Vent To protect control part from humidity by temperature fluctuation, Vents are on left and right side covered with Outer Cover.



13.3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan

Figure 13-3. Dimensions and Mounting Plan



ETR300-R has Small size and Large size depending on Recloser Type. Small size is available for EVR-1, EVR-2, Large size is available for EVR3.

Large size is able to make “User available Space” larger, the space unit is referred to “Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions”

Standard for EVR1, EVR2 is small size and for EVR3 is large size.

EVR1 (Recloser Rated Voltage : 15.5) / EVR2 (27) / EVR3 (38) For installation on a Pole, the lifting hole is indicated.

Weight of ETR300-R small size is 85 and large size is 90. ETR300-R should be fixed top and bottom with 16(5/8") Bolt. There is an Exit hole for external cable that can be connected to additional functioning

hardware.

The diameter of the hole is 22(0.866") and two of Standard Receptacle "MS22" Series can be extended.



13.4. Earth Wiring Diagram

Figure 13-4. Earth Wiring Diagram After installation of Control cubicle, connect the ground.

Earth Terminal can connect with core of cable size up to 12(0.470") diameter. Earth cable from Pole Neutral and from ETR300-R Earth Terminal must be connected to the

ground.



13.5. Inner Structure

Figure 13-5. Inner Structure

Controller Power NFB (No Fuse Breaker) Left side switch is for Battery and right side one is for 220Vac.

Heater Optional Heater is 40W

Battery Use 2 of 12Vdc in series. Use (＋) screwdriver for replacement.

Fuse TF1 is for circuit protection, refers to (see “13.18. Fuses”)

Terminal Block Place for AC Power line, there are two ports for user.

User Available Space Space for additional hardware connection. Installation and space size refers to “Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions”.

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

EN

D C

OVER

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

RA

IL H

OLD

ER

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

USL-5

SR

4

RA

IL H

OLD

ER

USL-5

SR

4



13.6. Mount Accessories Dimensions

Figure 13-6. Mount Accessories Dimensions

Shows base plate measurements that can be attached in User Available Space.

On Base plate, 10/M6 Nut is used to fix the base plate. Available space for height of base plate is from 101.6 (4”) to 177.8 (7”)



13.7. User-Available DC Power

Table 13-1. User-Available DC Power

Voltage Rating Voltage Range Maximum Power output Positions

24Vdc 20∼25Vdc 30W Continuous 70W 10second Short 1second

Side Panel PTR J (J1, J2-VCC/+) (J3, J4-GND/-)

15Vdc 14.0∼15.5Vdc

12Vdc 11.0∼12.5Vdc

Standard Voltage : 24Vdc / User can select Voltage Rating

30W DC Power is provided. In case of the necessity of larger than 30W, additional power

should be attached. For more details, contact manufacturer. Input of the additional power is referred to “Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses”

Remove cable coating at the end of cable length of 8mm(0.315＂). With using (＋) PTR J connector terminal on side panel should be connected to Wire size AWG24 up to 12.

To change Voltage ratings, disconnect Jumper Pin in JP3, and connect Jumper Pin to either JPI (24Vdc) or JP2 (15Vdc). Be sure of the voltage rating due to disassembly.

When overload, automatically circuit breaks current. In case long-term overload time, there is a fuse on analog circuits to protect circuits from failure.



13.8. Terminal Block and Fuses

Figure 13-7. Terminal Block and Fuses



Caution for an electric shock due to AC Power loaded in Terminal block. Standard AC Power is 220Vac. Terminal 2, 3 are connected to AC power supply through receptacle. Terminal 4, 5 are earth

terminal. Terminal 6,7 can be used for AC power supply branching by user. Terminal 6 is connected with

TF1 fuse for protection and Terminal 5 is connected directly to AC power. TF1 fuse(10A) is connected with 220Vac output and 40W heater. User shall be noticed. In AC line connection, blue wired line is for Neutral, white wired line is for Phase wire, green

wired line is for the ground. Terminal 14,15,16 are spare terminal for use of recloser 52 control. Terminal 1 is for user use. For more terminal requirement, User-available space is provided.

52 Contact Auxiliary Specs Rating (Resistive load) : 30Vdc 5A / 125Vdc 0.6A / 250Vdc 0.3A



13.9. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type

Figure 13-8. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type



Wiring diagram of ETR300-R standard. PTR E has different system wirings depending on User system. In “Figure 13-8. ETR300-R

Wiring Diagram - CVD Type”, PTR E is marked as Earthing System. PTR F, G is Voltage Input Connector. “Figure 13-8. ETR300-R Wiring Diagram - CVD Type” is CVD (Capacitor Voltage Divider) type VT type is standard and CVD type is for optional. CVD type and VT type are not exchangeable.



13.11. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram

Current IG is connected with Side Panel IN(E07,E08) in Earthing System. SEF(E09,E10) should be connected, so called “JUMPER” Current IN should be connected with SEF(E09,E10) of Side Panel in. Non Earthing System. IN(E07,E08) should be connected to each other.

Figure 13-9. Current Inputs Wiring Diagram

Recloser Phase should match with User system. Refer to “Figure 13-11. Phase Rotation” CT Phase rotation must be arranged comparing with Voltage Inputs Phase rotation.

I01

I02

I03

INIse

E01

E02

E03

E04

E05

E06

E07

E08

E09

E10

I01

I02

I03

INIse

E01

E02

E03

E04

E05

E06

E07

E08

E09

E10



13.12. CVD Wiring Diagram

Figure 13-10. CVD Wiring Diagram CVD (Capacitor Voltage Divider) measures Voltage with using Capacitor installed in each

Bushing of Recloser. CVD Type and VT Type are not exchangeable. Current Inputs and Voltage Inputs should be the same phase. If CT Inputs changed Phase

rotation, Voltage Inputs phase should be re-arranged.

Option CVD 15, 27, 38 Class Load Side CVD of EPR model is optional.

F01

F02

F03

F04

F05

F06

G01

G02

G03

G04

G05

G06

G07

G08

V11

V12

V13

V21

V22

V23

V0



13.13. Current and Voltage Inputs Phase Rotation

Figure 13-11. Phase Rotation

For Metering accuracy, phase rotations of User system and Recloser should be the same. “Figure 13-11. Phase Rotation” shows the same phase rotation between User System and

Recloser. If the phase rotation is not the same in User system and Recloser, correct CT and CVD wiring

in side panel to be matched. ETR300-R Recloser phase A is the Bushing the nearest from Trip lever on the side.



13.14. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 13-2. Control Cable Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Pin Function Pin Function

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U V W X Z

C.T Phase C C.T Phase B C.T Phase A C.T Common(G) CVD Source Phase C CVD Source Phase B CVD Source Phase A Ground(CVD Load side Phase T) Ground(CVD Load side Phase S) CVD Load side Phase R Pressure Sensor Output(controller input) not connected Pressure Sensor Power AGND Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc Cable shield and Ground not connected Recloser Status 69b(locked a connect) Recloser Status Common(24Vdc) Recloser Status 52b(Monitored Trip) Recloser Status 52a(Monitored Close) not connected not connected

a b c d e f g h j k m n p r s

52 common(Auxiliary) 52b(Auxiliary) 52a(Auxiliary) Close and Trip Coil Common Close and Trip Coil Common Close and Trip Coil Common Close Coil Close Coil Close Coil not connected Trip Coil not connected Trip Coil Trip Coil not connected

Control ETR300-R Receptacle : MS3102 28-21S(Female) Recloser Receptacle : MS3102 28-21P(Male) Control Cable : Shield Cable 8meter(31.5”) Cable Shielding layer is connected to Pin “R”



Figure 13-12. Control Receptacle “Figure 13-12. Control Receptacle” shows Female Receptacle installed in Control ETR300-R.



13.15. Control Cable Assembling / De-assembling

Do not turn Plug body when Control Cable assembling/de-assembling. For Control Cable assembling, connect with Receptacle check based with Pin Guide position.

Following notices are suggested. Turn Plug nut clockwise carefully to prevent Pin winding or out of gearing. Push Plug Body little by little with shaking left and right side into Receptacle; repeat this to

complete connection. Turn Plug nut to tighten for Control Cable de-assembling, do the opposite way of Control

Cable assembling

Figure 13-13. Recloser Receptacle Figure 13-14. Control Cable

13.16. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Table 13-3. AC Power Receptacle Pin Descriptions

Pin Function

Figure 13-15. Power Receptacle

A B C

AC Power Input AC Power Input (Neutral) not connected

Standard Input Voltage of Control ETR300-R is 220Vac.



13.17. AC Power Cable

TYPE : MS22-2S(Female) Cable Length : 2C-3.5 6meter(236") A PIN Wire Color : White(Phase) B PIN Wire Color : Black(Neutral) C PIN : not connected

13.18. Fuses

Table 13-4. Fuses

Positions Rating /

External AC - Power InputDimensions Purpose

Terminal Block TF1 10A 0.25"×1.25"

(6.385×31.75)

AC Power outlet and Heater

User Available AC Power

Inside Relay Module F1

(Power board) 5A

0.197"×0.787"

(5×20) User-Available DC Power



13.19. Battery and Control run time

Table 13-5. Battery Specs

Maker Global & Yuasa Battery Co., Ltd.(Made in Korea)

Battery Type ES18-12

Nominal Voltage 12V

Nominal capacity 18 amp-hours

Dimension 181×76×167(7.126×3×6.575")

Self-discharge Versus Time 12 month at +20(+68), 5 month at +40(+104)

Service life Time 3∼5 years at +20(+68), 1 years at +50(+122)

Battery Connector(CN11) Molex Connector 3191-2R

Controller run time 30 hours at +20(+68), 15 hours at -25(-13)

Recharge Time 60 hours at +20(+68)

Sealed lead - acid Battery Type, use 12Vdc 2 Batteries in series. Harness connector(CN11) from Battery Terminal is connected to

battery switch NFB1. In order to store Battery for a long time,

turn NFB1 “OFF” without disconnecting Harness connector.

The self-discharge rate of batteries is approximately 3% per

month when batteries are stored at an ambient temperature of

+20(+68). The self-discharge rate varies with ambient

temperature.

The approximate depth of discharge or remaining capacity of an

battery can be empirically determined from “Figure 13-17. Open Circuit Voltage”

Turn off NFB1 to disconnect Battery from circuits. Remove

Battery Connector CN11(3191-2R) and measure the battery

voltage.

If the battery voltage is less than 22.5Vdc, the residual capacity is

0%. The voltage can be recharged but requires maintenance.

24Vdc Battery supplies Relay Module and UPS Module through

NFB1(Battery Switch).

Relay Module supplies through PTR K Connector in Side Panel

and UPS Module supplies through CN5 Connector of UPS

Module.

Figure 13-16. Battery

Figure 13-17. Open Circuit Voltage



13.20. Charge Circuit

Charger uses current-control-circuit to prevent sudden-recharge and use voltage-steady-circuit to prevent over-recharge. Charge inspection use 24Vac the same power as Relay Module has. Disconnecting CN11 may cause spark, turn off NFB1(Battery Switch) and NFB2(Ac Power switch)

before disconnect CN11. Limit Current measuring should be tested on 10Ω in series with CD Ammeter.

Charge Voltage : 27.5Vdc(±0.5V) Charge Current : 300mAdc(±50mAdc)

13.21. Battery Change

Battery Mounting consists of two of Bolt M6-15L. Battery Wire consists of M5 Bolt & Nut and is connected to Battery Terminal. Bolt can be replaced using with (+) screwdriver. For Battery wire de-assembling, disconnect Jumper wire first and disconnect CN11 wire(red and black). When CN11 is disconnected first, battery short is considered in case of worker’s mistake. For Battery wire connection, connect CN11 wire (red and black) first and connect Jumper wire later. Reference “Figure 13-16. Battery”



13.22. Communication Cables

1) Cable CC201: Connect to Computer

Figure 13-18. Cable CC201 (connect to computer)

2) Cable CC202: Connect to Modem, etc. - option

Figure 13-19. Cable CC202 (connect to modem, etc.)

3) Cable CC203: Connect to Modem, etc. - option

Figure 13-20. Cable CC203 (connect to modem, etc.)



13.23. Hardware Block Diagram

Figure 13-21. Hardware Block Diagram

XPORTRJ45

23

1



13.24. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits

Figure 13-22. Recloser Trip and Close Circuits

CC Close Coil TC Trip Coil

IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor C Capacitor

UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply

Recloser Trip and Close Power is charged from C1 in UPS module. C1 is used for Trip power. Trip(Close) runs when IGBT is “ON”. MC runs and the charged Capacitor transfer the Power

to TC(CC), eventually Recloser runs.



13.25. Uninterruptible Power Supply for Trip & Close

Figure 13-23. UPS Module Block Diagram

UPS Module charges Capacitor for Trip/Close. Its rated output voltage is 120Vdc. Trip and Close capacitor are charged at the same time but during trip and close, it does not

affect to each other. UPS module operates with 24Vac power or spare battery. Transformer in ETR300-R connected with External AC Power generates 120Vac. Sealed lead-acid Type is used for Battery. Battery voltage does not run under 20Vac, runs over

20Vdc.



13.26. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram

Figure 13-24. Recloser EVR Wiring Diagram

Recloser EVR standard wiring diagram CT Protection is automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.

The capacity of CVD is 20, and also automatically protected when Control Cable is disconnected.



13.27. Recloser Current Transformer (CT)

Table 13-6. Current Transformer (CT)

Description Pin Function

CT Ratio : (1000:1/standard)

CT Resistance < 5Ω

A C.T Phase C

B C.T Phase B

C C.T Phase A

D C.T Common(G)

13.28. Recloser Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD)

Table 13-7. Capacitor Voltage Divider (CVD)


EVR RECLOSER 1) Pin R is connected to Ground.

2) CVD Capacitance : 20 3) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between

Phase and Ground.

E CVD Source Phase C

F CVD Source Phase B

G CVD Source Phase A

H CVD Load side Phase T

J CVD Load side Phase S

K CVD Load side Phase R

R Cable shield and Ground

EPR RECLOSER 1) Pin R is connected to Ground.

2) CVD Capacitance of Source Phase : 26 3) CVD Capacitance of Load side Phase : 20

(Option) 4) For CVD Protection, MOV is connected between

Phase and Ground. For voltage measuring, use High Impedance AC

Voltmeter(Digital Multimeter) at Output Pin.

Voltage Measuring Method 1 measure MOV voltage. (measure a voltage between MOV arms)

Voltage Measuring Method 2 Place the capacitor(C2) in parallel with MOV. and measure MOV voltage.

E CVD Source Phase C

F CVD Source Phase B

G CVD Source Phase A

K CVD Load side Phase R

R Cable shield and Ground

Figure 13-25. CVD Wiring Diagram



13.29. Recloser Pressure Sensor (Only EVR Type)

13.29.1. TYPE1 Sensor It is used of Recloser manufactured before JUNE, 2005.

Table 13-8. ETR300 Pressure Sensor


1) Sensor Power is delivered from

Pin P(+12Vdc±0.5 %) and N(-)

L Pressure Sensor Output

N Pressure Sensor Power AGND

P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc

2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-) 3) SF6 Gas is the insulating material and is affected by depending on pressure (density).

4) “Figure 13-26. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage” shows pressure changes depending on temperature and Sensor Output voltage depending on pressure.

5) ETR300-R has 0.5bar at 20

Figure 13-26. Pressure Changes depending on Temperature and Sensor Output voltage



13.29.2. TYPE2 Sensor It is used for Recloser manufactured after JULY, 2005.

Table 13-9. ETR300 Pressure Sensor


1) Sensor Power is delivered from

Pin P(+9~30Vdc) and N(-) 2) Sensor Output is Pin L(+) and N(-)

L Pressure Sensor Output

N Pressure Sensor Power AGND

P Pressure Sensor Power 12Vdc

Figure 13-27. Pressure Changes depending on Sensor Output voltage

0.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

-0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

Pressure (bar)

Outp

ut vo

ltage(V

dc)



13.30. Recloser 52 contact and 69 contact

Table 13-10. 52 contact and 69 contact


69 is b Contact when unlocked.

T 69b(Monitored locked)

U Common(52 and 69)

V 52b(Monitored Trip)

W 52a(Monitored Close)

a 52 common(Auxiliary)

b 52b(Auxiliary)

c 52a(Auxiliary)

13.31. Recloser Trip and Close Coil

Table 13-11. Trip and Close Coil


1) Pin d, e and f are combined as one line. 2) Pin g, h and j are combined and placed as one

line

3) Pin m, p and r are combined and placed as one line.

4) Close Coil Resistance : < 5Ω 5) Trip Coil Resistance : < 2Ω

d Close and Trip Coil Common

e Close and Trip Coil Common

f Close and Trip Coil Common

g Close Coil

h Close Coil

j Close Coil

m Trip Coil

p Trip Coil

r Trip Coil

RECLOSER

300

13.32

1) RTS 2) RTS

also

Standa

Table 13

Current

Voltage

Binary i

Binary o

Time AcWeight

Dimens

Control Operatin

Power in

R CONTROL

2. Recl

2010 Model2010 can d

can variousl

rd Ratings

3-12. StandaClassificat

output

output

input

output

ccuracy

ions

Interface Cabng Temperatu

nput

L ETR300-R

oser Te

l tests ETR3display Full Sly test Calibr

s and Featu

rd Ratings ation

ble ure

ENHANC

est Kit

00-R by FauSequence ofration Mode,

Figure 13-2

ures

and Features

1.5Arms ×4.5Arms×1Accuracy (7Vrms ×4cAccuracy (BI01~02: DBI03~04: DBO01~04130mA/35±5ms 6kg(RTS20325×150×2521×258×32M -20 +50∼

AC180~26AC 90~132Max. 150W

CED TECHN

ult Simulationf Trip time, OCR Mode

28. Recloser

s R

3ch (Burden b1ch (3ch Paral( 0.2% or 0.1mch (Burden ov( 0.2% or 0.00DC12~150V oDC12~150V(P

0V, ON Resis

010), 1.2kg(ca270 (RTS2010348 (AL CAS

64 @ Select A2 @ Select AC

W

NOLOGY

n. Trip current, External M

r Test Kit

Rating and Chbelow 1Ω) llel) mA) ver 1) 02V) or Dry contactPulse below 1

stance (below

able), 6kg AL 0)

SE)

AC220V C110V

http://w

, Interval onMode, Manual

haracteristic

t(User select) 1sec)

35 Ω)

Case

/www.entece

n LCD screel Mode.

ene.co.kr

en and



14. MAINTANANCE 14.1. Warning Events

In control panel warning led if is lighted up bellow table refer and inspects.

Table 14-1. Warning Events(1/2)

EVENT EVENT TEXT

(LCD) EXPLANATION

ETR300 ACTION

USER’ RECOMMENDED ACTION

SYSTEM POWER

ACFAIL External power FAIL -

1. Check AC Power NFB 2. Check AC Power fuse 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC -

connector is securely connected

CHGBAD Battery charge circuit FAIL (Value 23V)

-

1. Check AC supply 2. Check Battery charge Voltage

(range DC 27 ~ DC 28V) 3. Replace Analog Module

BATBAD

Battery Discharge (Value ≦ 21V) * Related Setting : TD Monitor>TD1-1

-

1. Check AC Power NFB 2. Check AC Power fuse 3. Check AC supply, ensure AC

connector is securely connected 4. Replace Battery charge T.R

NOBATT

NO Battery (Value < 19V) * Related Setting : TD Monitor>TD1-2

- 1. Check battery NFB 2. Check battery connection

POWER DOWN MODE

PWDOWN

Power down mode (Value < 19V and ACFAIL) * Related Setting : TD Monitor>TD1-2

Controller power turn off

No problem 1. Check AC supply 2. Check battery

GAS STATUS * applied only gas insulation type

GASLOW Gas pressure Low -

1.Ensure Control cable is securely connected

2. Check Control cable fault 3. Replace Main Processing Module 4. Replace Recloser.

GASHIGH Gas pressure High -

1.Ensure Control cable is securely connected

2. Check Control cable fault 3. Replace Relay Module 4. Replace Recloser

SYSTEM RESTART

SYSRST System restarted - No problem

CLDRST Cold Restarted - No problem

SETTING (Refer to SET CHANGE Event)

GLOBAL, PRI’ GRP or ALT’ GRP

Setting Changed -

No problem * But somebody modified the setting

data.



Table 14-1. Warning Events(2/2)

EVENT EVENT TEXT

(LCD) EXPLANATION ETR300 ACTION USER’ RECOMMENDED

ACTION

SELF TEST

SELFTERR System error detected while booting

Detail message are recorded in diagnostic event

1.Check the diagnostic event 2.Refer to EVENT TEXT

DIGGSET Global setting error Restored default setting by itself

1. Execute System Restart 2. Execute default setting 3. Replace Main Processing Module

DIGPSET Group setting error Restored default setting by itself

1. Execute System Restart 2. Execute default setting 3. Replace Main Processing Module

DIGSPU DSP board link error All protection and measurement are disabled

1. Execute System Restart 2. Replace DSP Module

DIGEVT Recorded events format error

Cleared events by itself 1. Execute All Clear Event 2. Execute System Restart 3. Replace Main Processing Module

DIGLOG PLC data error Restored default PLC by itself

1. Execute default PLC 2. Execute System Restart 3. Replace Main Processing Module

TRIP & CLOSE

DIGCL Close fail -

1. Check the close/trip module 2. Check the receptacle pin 3. Replace the hardware or update firmware

DIGOP Trip fail -

1. Check the close/trip module 2. Check the receptacle pin 3. Replace the hardware or update firmware



14.2. Malfunction Events

The following table of events describes the malfunction events available from the control and what they indicate. It also suggest steps to follow to assist in determining why the event was generated.

Table 14-2. Malfunction Events

EVENT DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE RECOMMENDED ACTION

OPERATION FAIL Operation Fail

Control Cable

1. Connection state of control cable

2. control Box inside CN2 connection state check

- Table 13-2 - Figure 4-12 - Figure 13-8

- Figure 13-12 - Reference

3. control Box inside CN4 connection state check

- Figure 4-10 - Figure 13-8 Reference

Etc..

1.That control switch point of contact check

2. control Box inside FUSE state check

- Figure 13-7 Reference

3. Replace Relay Module

4. Replace Recloser

Fail of current &

voltage measurement

Current measure

Control Cable

1 Connection state of control cable

2. control Box inside Current connection state

check



Voltage

meaasure

1 Connection state of control cable

2. control Box inside Voltage connection state

check





15. PLC function ETR300-R has PLC(Programmable Logic Control) for user. PLC has Timer, Counter and Event to control input and output. Circuit can be optimized to omit unnecessary timer and aux. relay. During ETR300-R running, in case the circuit needs to be changed, PLC can be used to meet user’s need. PLC is programmed in “ETR300 Interface Software”.

Figure 15-1. PLC Screen

01_ETR300R_Manual_Control_ver1.47_201304

Documents

Transcript of 01_ETR300R_Manual_Control_ver1.47_201304